Lucent Technologies PacketStar PSAX User Manual

ಪಿಡಿಎಫ್

ದಾಖಲೆ

ಜಾಹಿರಾತು

PacketStar

®

PSAX

12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice

Module

User Guide

for

PacketStar

®

PSAX Multiservice Media Gatewayss

Issue 1, September 2002

System Software Release 8.0

AQueView

®

EMS Software Release 6.0

Doc. No.: 255-700-243

For trademark, regulatory compliance, and related legal information, see the "Legal Notices, Safety, and Regulatory Information" section.

Legal Notices, Safety, and Regulatory

Information

Copyright

This material is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity (either internal or external to Lucent Technologies), except in accordance with applicable agreements, contracts or licensing, without the express written consent of the originating organization and the business management owner of the material.

This document was prepared by the Information Design and Development

Team of Lucent Technologies, PacketStar PSAX products. Offices are located in

Landover, Maryland, USA.

Trademarks

PacketStar, AQueView, Lucent, Lucent Technologies, and the Lucent Technologies logo are registered trademarks of Lucent Technologies in the USA. Other product and brand names mentioned in this guide are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Notices

The information in this document is for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by

Lucent Technologies, Inc. This document is without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied. Lucent Technologies, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors, inaccuracies, or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information or instructions contained herein. Lucent Technologies, Inc. is not responsible for any damage or loss to your data or equipment resulting either directly or indirectly from use of this document.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

iii

Legal Notices, Safety, and Regulatory Information

Warranty Information

Software and Hardware Limited Warranties

Lucent Technologies provides a 90-day limited software warranty, and a oneyear limited hardware warranty on this product. Refer to the Software License and Limited Warranty Agreement and the Lucent Technologies InterNetworking Systems Global Warranty that accompanied your package for more information.

Warranty Warnings

CAUTION:

Modifying or tampering with PSAX chassis components may void your warranty. Any modification to this equipment not expressly authorized by Lucent Technologies may void your granted authority to operate such equipment.

CAUTION:

When inserting modules into the chassis, slide them gently, not forcefully. Excessive force may cause the modules to be seated improperly in the chassis, and result in possible damage to the module or the chassis.

Install or remove modules one at a time. Doing this aids in preventing the PSAX system from indicating any erroneous failure messages, and allows the PSAX system to reinitialize and display the accurate configuration of the module that is inserted .

CAUTION:

Shipping the chassis with removable I/O, server, or CPU modules installed may cause damage to the chassis and the modules. Damage to any of the components in the system resulting from shipping the chassis with removable modules installed will void your warranty. Only Lucentauthorized personnel should ship the PSAX chassis with a module installed.

Safety Warnings and Information

When installing and operating the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module, follow the safety guidelines provided in the printed

PacketStar

PSAX Safety Guidelines , which accompanies this product, to help prevent serious personal injury and damage to the 12-Port

Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module. Please read all warnings and instructions supplied before beginning installation or configuration of this module. In addition to the general safety information provided, you should

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1 iv

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Legal Notices, Safety, and Regulatory Information

Regulatory Standards Compliance also refer to the text in the PacketStar PSAX user and installation guides for other important safety information and procedures.

Regulatory Standards Compliance

Safety and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

The following PacketStar PSAX systems are compliant with applicable safety and EMC standards when configured with the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1

Multiservice module (model 23N64):

• PSAX 1000 system

• PSAX 1250 system

• PSAX 2300 system

• PSAX 4500 system

Please refer to the appropriate PacketStar PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway user guide or installation guide for additional information.

Telecommunications

• FCC Part 68 (USA)

• CS-03 Issue 8 (Canada)

USA Regulatory Statement

FCC Part 68 This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the back of the

PSAX chassis is a label that contains the FCC registration number, in addition to other information. You must provide this information to the telephone company, if they request it. The FCC requires Lucent Technologies to provide you with the following information:

1. This equipment has digital service interface capabilities using RJ-48C and RJ-48H connectors. The facility interface codes with which this equipment complies for digital services are as follows: 04DU9-BN,

04DU9-DN, 04DU9-1KN, and 04DU9-1SN. This equipment has loop start interface capabilities using an RJ-11C connector. The facility interface code with which this equipment complies for service is 02LS2. The service order codes for this equipment are 6.0F for the T1 interface and

9.0Y for the loop start interface.

2. An FCC-compliant telephone network interface jack is built into this equipment and is compatible with interconnections that are Part 68 compliant.

3. The REN for the Voice 2-Wire Office module when used in this equipment is 0.7B.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

Legal Notices, Safety, and Regulatory Information

Regulatory Standards Compliance

4. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service might be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe this is necessary.

5. The telephone company might make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

6. If you experience trouble with this equipment, or need repairs or warranty information, please refer to the Lucent Technologies InterNetworking

Systems Global Warranty that accompanied your PSAX product shipment for instructions on obtaining technical support in your area.

If this equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company might request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.

7. This equipment has no user-serviceable parts.

This equipment cannot be used on public coin telephone service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact your state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information.

Canadian Regulatory Statements

CS-03 Issue 8 Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) Notice. NOTICE: This equipment meets applicable Industry Canada Terminal Equipment Technical

Specifications. This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to the Voice 2-Wire Office module denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop, which is used by the device, to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the REN of all devices does not exceed 5.

The REN for the Voice 2-Wire Office module when used in the PSAX system is 0.7B.

SH-03 Version 8

Avis de nombre équivalent de sonneries (REN). AVIS: Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada applicables au matériel terminal. Cette conformité est confirmée par le numéro d’enregistrement. Le sigle, IC, placé devant le numéro d’enregistrement, signifie que l’enregistrement s’est effectué con-

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1 vi

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Legal Notices, Safety, and Regulatory Information

Regulatory Standards Compliance formément à une déclaration de conformité et indique que les spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada ont été respectées. Il n’implique pas qu’Industrie Canada a approuvé le matériel.

Le nombre équivalent de sonnerie (REN) attribué au module central bifilaire

(Voice 2-Wire Office) correspond au pourcentage de la charge totale à connecter à un circuit téléphonique bifilaire; il est utilisé par l’appareil pour prévenir la surcharge. Le circuit peut être terminé par n’importe quelle combinaison d’appareils, à la seule condition que le total des REN de ces derniers ne dépasse pas cinq.

Lorsqu’il est utilisé dans le système PSAX, le module central bifilaire possède un REN de 0,7 B.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

vii

Legal Notices, Safety, and Regulatory Information

Regulatory Standards Compliance

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1 viii

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Software and Hardware Limited Warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Warranty Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Safety Warnings and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Regulatory Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v

Safety and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v

Telecommunications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v

USA Regulatory Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v

FCC Part 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v

Canadian Regulatory Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi

CS-03 Issue 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi

Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix

List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii

1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Purpose of This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1

Audience for This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1

What You Should Know . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1

Related Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Lucent Technologies Information Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Product Information Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Printed Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

Other Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

About Lucent Technologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

About the PacketStar PSAX Product Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3

PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

Contents

Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Text Types Used in This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Icons and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Use of Command Description Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Use of Field Description Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

General Navigational Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Selecting Options, Fields, and Commands Using the Console Interface . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Selecting Menu Options and Fields in the AQueView GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Help Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Comments on This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

2 Module Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Overview of This Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Connection Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Software Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Chassis Speed, Power Consumption, and Memory Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Loopback Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Obtaining General Module Data and Accessing Ports and Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Configuring the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Configuring the Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Configuring Medium-Density DS1 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Configuring a Port with One Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Configuring a Port with Several Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Viewing Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Saving the Equipment Configuration and Logging Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1 x

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Contents

Avoiding Common Errors When Configuring Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1

Optimizing SVC Call Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

Configuring and Viewing the ATM IISP Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3

Bringing One or More ATM IISP Interfaces Into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10

Viewing IISP Interface Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11

Viewing IISP Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12

Taking One or More IISP Interfaces Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12

Deleting One or More ATM IISP Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14

Modifying IISP Interface Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17

Configuring a PNNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17

Bringing One or More PNNI Interfaces Into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26

Viewing the Parameters of a PNNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27

Viewing PNNI Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28

Taking One or More PNNI Interfaces Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30

Deleting One or More PNNI Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32

Modifying a PNNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34

Modifying the Non-administrative Weight Values for the ATM PNNI Interface. . . . . .4-34

Configuring PNNI ILMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35

Viewing PNNI ILMI Interface Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40

Configuring the ATM UNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40

Bringing One or More ATM UNI Interfaces into Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49

Viewing the Parameters for an ATM UNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49

Viewing ATM UNI Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49

Taking One or More ATM UNI Interfaces out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51

Deleting One or More ATM UNI Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53

Modifying an ATM UNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55

Managing CAS Trunkline Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56

Configuring a CAS Trunkline Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56

Bringing One or More CAS Interfaces Into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61

Viewing CAS Trunkline Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62

Taking One or More CAS Trunkline Interfaces Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62

Deleting One or More CAS Trunkline Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63

Modifying One or More CAS Trunkline Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65

Managing Circuit Emulation Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66

Configuring a Circuit Emulation Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66

Bringing a Circuit Emulation Interface Into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

Contents

Viewing the Parameters of a Specific Circuit Emulation Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

Viewing the Circuit Emulation Module Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Taking a Circuit Emulation Interface Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Deleting a Circuit Emulation Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

Modifying a Circuit Emulation Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Configuring the Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

Bringing One or More Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interfaces Into Service . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

Viewing One or More Frame Relay UNI or NNI LMI DLCI Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

Viewing Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

Viewing FR Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

Viewing Frame Relay LMI Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

Taking One or More Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interfaces Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . 4-86

Deleting One or More Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

Modifying a Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89

GR-303 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

Managing HDLC Passthrough Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

Configuring the HDLC Passthrough Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91

Bringing One or More HDLC Pass Through Interfaces into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

Viewing the HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

Viewing HDLC Pass Through Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

Taking One or More Interfaces Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98

Deleting One or More HDLC Passthrough Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100

Modifying Interface Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101

Managing PRI ISDN Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

Accessing/Viewing the Enhanced ISDN LAPD and BChannel Configuration

Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102

Configuring the PRI ISDN Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104

Bringing the Interface Into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106

Provisioning Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106

5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Loopback Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Using the Right-Click Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Configuring Ports and Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Context-Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Accessing Port and Channel Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1 xii

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Contents

Configuring the Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4

Configuring the Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4

Viewing Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Configuring Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Applying an Interface to a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Strapping DS0s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Configuring Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Provisioning Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Copying a Port Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Obtaining Module Hardware Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Obtaining Module Status Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Obtaining Hardware Operating Status Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Obtaining LED Status Indicator Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Obtaining Port Configuration Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Ghosted Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Saving the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Overview of This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1

Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1

Configuring the ATM IISP Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1

Accessing or Viewing the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2

Setting the Values for the ATM IISP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Viewing Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8

Viewing Interface Utilization Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12

Accessing or Viewing the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . .6-12

Viewing Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-22

Configuring the Integrated Link Management Interface (ILMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24

Accessing or Viewing the ILMI Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24

Setting ILMI Configuration Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24

Viewing Registered Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28

Viewing ILMI Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29

Viewing Interface Utilization Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33

Accessing or Viewing the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33

Viewing ATM UNI Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-43

Configuring the Integrated Link Management Interface (ILMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45

Accessing or Viewing the ILMI Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

xiii

Contents

Setting ILMI Configuration Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45

Viewing Registered Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

Viewing ILMI Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49

Viewing Interface Utilization Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50

Configuring the CAS TrunkLine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53

Accessing or Viewing the CAS TrunkLine Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . 6-53

Setting CAS TrunkLine Interface Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54

Configuring the Circuit Emulation Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57

Accessing or Viewing the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window . . . . . 6-57

Configuring Circuit Emulation Interface Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61

Configuring the Frame Relay User/Network Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64

Accessing or Viewing the Frame Relay Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . 6-64

Setting Values for the Frame Relay UNI/NNI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66

Viewing DLCIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69

Viewing Frame Relay Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70

Viewing LMI Frame Relay Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72

Configuring the GR-303 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74

Configuring the HDLC Passthrough Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75

Accessing or Viewing the HDLC Passthrough Interface Configuration Window . . . . 6-75

HDLC Passthrough Interface Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77

Viewing HDLC Pass Through Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77

Configuring the PRI ISDN User/Network Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79

Accessing or Viewing the PRI ISDN User/Network Interface Configuration Window. 6-79

Configuring PRI ISDN Interface Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80

Adding NSAP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83

Correcting Errors When Applying an Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84

Utilization Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85

Bringing an Interface Into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85

Performing Bulk Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85

Copying an Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88

Changing Interface Configuration Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90

Changing ATM PNNI Interface Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90

Changing Frame Relay Interface Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90

Taking the Interface Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90

Deleting an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91

Saving Your Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92

Provisioning Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1 xiv

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Contents

Appendix A: Pin Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Overview of This Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Configurations for the MD DS1 Module Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Appendix B: Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Overview of This Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

ATM Traffic Descriptors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

Purpose of Traffic Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

Connections Supporting Traffic Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

Traffic Descriptors Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2

SPVC Connection Cause Codes Table for Connection Retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3

DSP Tone Detection Modes Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7

DSP2C Module Channel Reduction When Using Fax Relay Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-8

Industry Compliance Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-8

Interface Type by Connection Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-22

Interface Type by I/O Module Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-23

Minimum AAL2 Trunk Size Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-28

Standard AAL2 Calculation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-28

Fax Relay Using AAL2 Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-29

Module Alarm Status Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-29

Quality of Service (QoS) Information Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-30

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

List of Figures

3-1

3-2

3-3

3-4

3-5

1-1

2-1

2-2

2-3

Main Menu Help Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10

12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Modules Connected to the PSAX 24-Port RJ Patch Panel

(Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Modules Connected to the PSAX 24-Port RJ Patch Panel

(Back View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Loopback Configuration Options on the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module .3-2

Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 1000 System (Page 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 1250 System (Page 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 2300 or PSAX 4500 System (Page 1) . .3-4

Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 1000, PSAX 2300, or PSAX 4500 System

(Page 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

4-6

4-7

4-8

4-9

4-2

4-3

4-4

4-5

3-6

3-7

3-8

Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 1250 System (Page 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Console Interface Main Menu (Equipment Configuration Selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9

Equipment Configuration Window (As Displayed on the PSAX 1250, PSAX 2300, and PSAX 4500

Console) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9

Medium-Density DS1 Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 3-9

3-10 Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11

3-11 Medium-Density DS1 Channel Configuration Window (One Channel per Port) . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

3-12 Medium-Density DS1 Channel Configuration Window (Several Channels per Port) . . . . . . . .3-21

3-13 Medium-Density DS1 DS0s Strap Display Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

3-14 Medium-Density DS1 Port Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

4-1 ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18

ATM PNNI Interface Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29

PNNI ILMI Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35

PNNI ILMI Interface Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39

ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window (ATM UNI 3.0 or 3.1 Selected on the Module) . . .4-41

ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window (ATM UNI 4.0 Selected on the Module) . . . . . . . .4-42

ATM UNI Interface Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50

CAS Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-57

4-10 Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67

4-11 Frame Relay Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-76

4-12 Frame Relay LMI DLCI Status Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-81

4-13 Frame Relay Interface Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-83

4-14 Frame Relay LMI Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85

4-15 HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-92

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

xix

List of Figures

5-3

5-4

5-5

5-6

4-16 HDLC Pass Through Interface Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

4-17 Enhanced ISDN LAPD and BChannel Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103

5-1

5-2

Sample Port Configuration (Displaying Right-Click Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Sample Channel Configuration (Displaying Right-Click Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Sample of Context-Sensitive Help (Displayed on a Port and Channel Configuration Window) 5-3

Device Tree and Device Window (Displaying a Typical Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Front Panel View of the Medium-Density DS1 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Medium-Density DS1 Port Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

5-7

5-8

5-9

Medium-Density DS1 Port Configuration Window (Menu Displayed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Medium-Density DS1 Channel Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

5-10 Sample Copy Port Configuration Window (After Initially Selecting the Copy Button From a Port

Configuration Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

5-11 Sample Copy Port Configuration Window (After Selecting a Valid Attributes) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

5-12 Sample Device Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

5-13 Obtaining Hardware Data from a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

5-14 Sample Module Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

5-15 Obtaining LED Status Indicator Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

5-16 Port Status Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

5-17 Device Tree Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

6-1

6-2

ATM IISP Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

ATM IISP Interface Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

6-3

6-4

6-5

6-6

ATM IISP Utilization Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

ILMI Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

6-7

6-8

Registered User Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

ATM PNNI Utilization Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31

6-9 ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window (3.0 or 3.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

6-10 ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window (4.0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

6-11 ATM UNI Interface Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

6-12 ILMI Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46

6-13 Registered User Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

6-14 ATM UNI Utilization Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51

6-15 CAS TrunkLine Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53

6-16 Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58

6-17 Frame Relay Interface Window (Before Clicking Apply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64

6-18 Frame Relay Interface Window (After Clicking Apply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67

6-19 Frame Relay LMI DLCI Status Table Window (Displaying Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70

6-20 Frame Relay Interface Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71

6-21 Frame Relay LMI Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1 xx

Release 8.0

255-700-243

List of Figures

6-22 HDLC PassThrough Interface Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75

6-23 HDLC PassThrough Interface Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-77

6-24 PRI ISDN Interface Configuration Window (User) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-79

6-25 Select NSAP Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-84

6-26 Sample Copy Interface Configuration Window (After Initially Selecting the Copy Button

From a Port Configuration Page) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-89

6-27 Sample Copy Interface Configuration Window (After Selecting Valid Attributes) . . . . . . . . . .6-89

6-28 Delete Interface Confirmation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-91

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

xxi

List of Figures

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1 xxii

Release 8.0

255-700-243

List of Tables

1-5

1-6

1-7

1-8

1-1

1-2

1-3

1-4

2-1

2-2

4-6

4-7

4-8

4-9

4-2

4-3

4-4

4-5

3-4

3-5

3-6

4-1

2-3

3-1

3-2

3-3

Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Command Description Table Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Field Description Table Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

System Responses to Selecting Options, Fields, or Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Shortcut Keys for Navigating Console Interface Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Selecting Multiple Menu Options or Buttons in Succession . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

How Fields Are Displayed in the AQueView GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Shortcut Keys for Navigating the AQueView GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Physical Hardware Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Performance and Power Specifications for the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

LED Indicators for the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Field Descriptions for the Equipment Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Alarm Status Descriptions for Modules on the Equipment Configuration Window. . . . . . . . . 3-8

Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window . . 3-13

Field Descriptions for the Medium Density DS1 Channel Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Field Descriptions for the DS0s Strap Display Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port Statistics Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Windows on Which You Can Bring an ATM IISP Interface into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Windows on Which You Can Take an IISP Interface out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Windows on Which You Can Delete One or More ATM IISP Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Windows on Which You Can Bring an PNNI Interface into Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Windows on Which You Can Take an PNNI Interface out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Windows on Which You Can Delete One or More PNNI Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

4-10 Field Descriptions for the PNNI ILMI Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

4-11 Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI ILMI Interface Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

4-12 Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

4-13 Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

4-14 Windows on Which You Can Take an ATM UNI Interface out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52

4-15 Windows on Which You Can Delete One or More ATM UNI Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

4-16 Field Descriptions for the CAS Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

4-17 Windows on Which You Can Bring an CAS Trunkline Interface into Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

xxiii

List of Tables

4-18 Windows on Which You Can Take an CAS Trunkline Interface out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

4-19 Windows on Which You Can Delete One or More CAS Trunkline Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

4-20 Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69

4-21 Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

4-22 Windows on Which You Can Bring an Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface into Service . . . . . . 4-80

4-23 Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay LMI DLCI Status Table Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

4-24 Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay Interface Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

4-25 Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay LMI Statistics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86

4-26 Windows on Which You Can Take an Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface Out of Service . . . . 4-88

4-27 Field Descriptions for the HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

4-28 Windows on Which You Can Bring an HDLC Pass Through Interface into Service . . . . . . . . . 4-95

4-29 Field Descriptions for the HDLC Passthrough Interface Statistics Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

4-30 Windows on Which You Can Take an HDLC Passthrough Interface Out of Service . . . . . . . . 4-99

4-31 Field Descriptions for the Enhanced ISDN LAPD and B Channel Configuration Window . . . 4-105

5-2

5-3

Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window . . . 5-8

Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port Statistics Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

5-9

6-1

6-2

6-3

5-4

5-6

5-7

5-8

Selecting Channels for Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Field Descriptions for the Module Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

LED Status Indicator Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Port Status Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Removing Ghosted Modules from the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

6-4

6-5

6-6

6-7

Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

Field Descriptions for the PNNI ILMI Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

Field Descriptions for the ILMI Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

6-8

6-9

Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45

Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI ILMI Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47

6-10 Field Descriptions for the ILMI Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49

6-11 Field Descriptions for the CAS Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55

6-12 Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62

6-13 Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay Interface Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67

6-14 Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay Interface Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72

6-15 Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay LMI Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74

6-16 Field Descriptions for the HDLC Passthrough Interface Statistics Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78

6-18 Field Descriptions for the PRI ISDN Network/User Configuration Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81

6-19 Performing an Action on an Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1 xxiv

Release 8.0

255-700-243

List of Tables

B-3

B-4

B-5

B-6

6-20 Enabling or Disabling Traps Decision Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87

B-1 DSP Tone Detection Modes and Associated Processing Performed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

B-2 Channel Reduction Availability Caused by Fax Relay Connections vs. Voice

Processing Connections on a DSP2C Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

Industry Compliance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

Connection Type by Interface Type Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22

Interface Types by I/O Module Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23

Standard (Multiplexed) AAL2 Bandwidth Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28

B-7

B-8

Non-Multiplexed AAL2 Transmission Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29

Alarm Status Descriptions for Modules on the Equipment Configuration Window. . . . . . . . B-30

B-9 PSAX System-Supported Quality of Service Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31

B-10 Class of Service Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31

B-11 Cell Loss and Cell Delay Characteristics of ATM Service Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32

B-12 Mapping ATM Service Classes to PSAX System Priority Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

xxv

List of Tables

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1 xxvi

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Part 1: General

Getting Started

Purpose of This Guide

The PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User

Guide provides a description of the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module. It also provides the following information:

• PacketStar I/O module configuration overview

• Using the PSAX system to configure ports and channels

• Using the PSAX system to configure interfaces

For information on provisioning connections, see the PacketStar

PSAX System

Provisioning Connections User Guide for PacketStar

PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways.

Note: If you are using this module for the first time, you should read through this guide in its entirety before beginning the configuration process. The chapters in this guide are arranged in the logical order of normal configuration and should be performed in that order to achieve optimum performance of the module(s).

Audience for This Guide

The information in this guide is intended for users who will configure ports and channels for the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module, and configure the interface types for the PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway system, whether using the console interface or the AQueView Element Management System (EMS).

What You Should Know

Before you use this document or operate a PacketStar PSAX device, you should already understand and have experience with the following:

• ATM Forum, Frame Relay Forum, and other telecommunications specifications

• Ethernet network capabilities

• Internet Protocol capabilities

• Data network design

• Telephony network design

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

1-1

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Lucent Technologies Information Products

Product Information

Library

To install, operate, and configure your PSAX system and I/O and server modules, read the PSAX publications provided on your Lucent Technologies

PacketStar PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways Products, Product Information

Library CD-ROM.

Printed Documents

For your convenience, many of the documents included on the PacketStar

PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways Product Information Library CD-ROM are also available in printed form. You can order these documents through the Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center Web site at: www.lucentdocs.com

Other Publications Numerous books are currently available on the subject of basic telecommunications technology and specific protocols. In addition to such general reading, you should also be familiar with the specifications identified in the appendix entitled Reference Tables at the back of the guide.

About Lucent Technologies

Lucent Technologies is the communications systems and technology company formed through the restructuring of AT&T. We bring with us a tradition of more than 125 years of experience and a dedication to superior customer service.

Lucent Technologies manufactures, sells, and services a complete line of customer premises communications units, and commercial and multimedia communications and messaging systems designed and supported by our research and development unit, Bell Laboratories.

Our legacy and our spirit of innovation allow Lucent to provide our customers with the tools needed to communicate effectively, any time and anywhere, and to integrate the latest technologies into real-life solutions that help make business work.

About the PacketStar PSAX Product Family

Lucent Technologies provides a complete range of PSAX Multiservice Media

Gateways in the PacketStar PSAX family.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

1-2

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 1 Getting Started

About the PacketStar PSAX Product Family

PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway

The PacketStar PSAX 1000 Multiservice Media Gateway is designed to provide a full range of central office-based multiservice media gateway functions in a small, competitively-priced package suitable for customer premise deployment. Ideal for central office, large enterprise, or wireless cell site multiservice media gateway applications, the PSAX 1000 system provides highly reliable network access for time-division multiplex voice, Frame Relay,

10/100Base-T Ethernet, and ATM data applications.

When it is functioning in a redundant operating mode and after it has experienced a single-point failure, the PSAX 1000 system provides up to 630 Mbps of ATM cell bus capacity. The total ATM cell bus capacity of the system may also be scaled to provide nonblocking, nonredundant chassis bandwidths beyond 630 Mbps.

Supporting four slots (19–inch chassis) for I/O and server modules—with a full range of interfaces such as DS0A, DS1/E1, DS3/E3, OC-3, OC-3c/STM-1,

OC-12c/STM-4c, 10/100Base-T Ethernet, and serial—the PSAX 1000 system is a cost-effective access switch solution for connecting to legacy equipment.

PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway

The PacketStar PSAX 1250 Multiservice Media Gateway is designed to provide a full range of central office-based multiservice ATM access functions. Ideal for the central office or a large enterprise’s multiservice media gateway, the

PSAX 1250 system provides highly reliable network access for time-division multiplex voice, frame relay, 10/100Base-T Ethernet, and ATM data applications.

When it is functioning in a redundant operating mode and after it has experienced a single-point failure, the PSAX 1250 system provides up to 600 Mbps of ATM cell bus capacity. The total ATM cell bus capacity of the system may also be scaled to provide nonblocking, nonredundant chassis bandwidths beyond 600 Mbps.

Supporting 10 slots (19-inch chassis) or 14 slots (23-inch chassis) for I/O and server modules—with a full range of interfaces such as DS0A, DS1/E1,

DS3/E3, OC-3, OC-3c/STM-1, OC-12c/STM-4c, 10/100Base-T Ethernet, and serial—the PSAX 1250 system is a cost-effective access switch solution for interworking with legacy equipment.

PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway

The PacketStar PSAX 2300 Multiservice Media Gateway offers carrier-grade, high-density multiservice ATM access functions. Designed as the multiservice media gateway for the central office or for a large enterprise customer, the

PSAX 2300 system provides network access for time-division multiplex voice, frame relay, 10/100Base-T Ethernet, and ATM data applications.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

1-3

Chapter 1 Getting Started

About the PacketStar PSAX Product Family

When it is functioning in a redundant operating mode and after it has experienced a single-point failure, the PSAX 2300 system provides up to 1.9 Gbps of ATM cell bus capacity. The total ATM cell bus capacity of the system may also be scaled to provide nonblocking, nonredundant chassis bandwidths beyond 1.9 Gbps.

Supporting 15 slots for I/O and server modules—with provisions for OC-3,

OC-3c/STM-1, and OC-12c/STM-4c interfaces, N x T1/E1 module protection switching, and a full range of interfaces such as DS0A, DS1/E1, DS3/E3,

10/100Base-T Ethernet, and serial—the PSAX 2300 system solves demanding and diverse network design challenges with ease.

PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway

The PacketStar PSAX 4500 Multiservice Media Gateway provides carrier-class reliability, with an unmatched range of service capabilities, end-to-end traffic prioritization, “any-service, any-channel” flexibility, and breakthrough voice technology. Ideal for the central office or a large enterprise multiservice media gateway, the PSAX 4500 system provides highly reliable network access for time-division multiplex voice, frame relay, 10/100Base-T Ethernet, and ATM data applications.

When it is functioning in a redundant operating mode and after it has experienced a single-point failure, the PSAX 4500 system provides up to 4.2 Gbps of ATM cell bus capacity. The total ATM cell bus capacity of the system may also be scaled to provide nonblocking, nonredundant chassis bandwidths beyond 4.2 Gbps.

The high-performance midplane design supports 15 interface slots. Module protection for two groups of four or six multiport DS3, STS-1e, or E3 modules is provided via an N:1 protection scheme using rear access line interface modules. The protection module provides backup so that on the failure of any one of the modules in a group, traffic is maintained. A single PSAX 4500 system at the edge of the carrier network can transition traffic from a large number of network customers over high-speed DS1/E1 IMA, DS3/E3, OC-3,

OC-3c/STM-4c, and OC-12c/STM-4c trunks into the ATM core, managing the whole quickly and efficiently, down to the individual permanent virtual circuit.

Through the use of the latest DSP voice technology, the PSAX 4500 system supports advanced voice traffic over ATM (VToA) services for up to 6048 DS0 channels. As a multiservice media gateway—with H.248 call control, CAS,

PRI, GR-303, and V5.2 protocols, 3-Port DS3/STS-1e, 1-Port OC-3/STM-1

CES, and Tones and Announcements modules—the PSAX 4500 system provides packet solutions for voice over x DSL, trunking, tandem, and PRI offload switching.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

1-4

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Conventions

Text Types Used in This Document

This guide uses a different typeface to denote text displayed on console interface windows and equipment, as well as data you enter. Table 1-1 shows how each typographical convention is used.

Table 1-1. Text Conventions

Appearance How it is used

SANS SERIF BOLD, ALL CAPS Labels on module panels, chassis faceplates, or other hardware

Fixed-width normal

Serif bold

Fixed-width bold

Serif italics

Message text displayed on the user interface window

• Button name (GUI interface) or command name

(console interface) on the user interface window

• Literal text for values that the user types or selects from predefined sets of values for fields

• Commands or literal argument values

System prompts displayed on the user interface window

• A variable name or string for which you will substitute your own information

• An argument or parameter on a command line for which you will substitute your own information

Icons and Symbols

Refer to the procedures within this <Var.TypeofGuide-installation guide user guide module guide etc> for important safety information and proper procedures.

Standard icons and symbols to alert you to dangers, warnings, cautions, and notes are described as follows:

DANGER:

Warnings for a personal injury hazard are identified by this format.

WARNING:

Warnings relating to risk of equipment damage or failure are identified by this format.

CAUTION:

Warnings relating to risk of data loss or other general precautionary notes are identified by this format.

Note: Identifies additional information pertinent to the text preceding this note.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

1-5

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Conventions

Use of Command Description Tables

All configuration screen illustrations (windows) in this guide for both the console interface and for the AQueView EMS, are followed by a display or command description table describing the window display-only, command, or button functions displayed on the window. You are urged to read all the information in the command description table, especially upon first use, as commands may have special instructions or configuration constraints called out in the Function column cells by use of the Note: text convention (see

Table 1-2).

Table 1-2. Command Description Table Example

Command Function

Bring All Interfaces

Into Service

Brings the out-of-service configured interfaces to inservice status.

Note: In GR-303 configuration, it is critical to bring into service only those channels actively configured with DS1 ports.

Use of Field Description Tables

Field description tables usually follow the command description tables. Field description tables define the fields, their functions, configuration choices, and constraints, if applicable. As in command description tables, the Note: text convention is also used, where appropriate, in the field description tables to alert the user to special instructions or configuration constraints (see

Table 1-3).

Identifies editable fields or display-only fields on screens

Identifies initial field value default

Describes the function of the field and special instructions for configuring modules

Table 1-3. Field Description Table Example

Field Name

Interface Type

Field Value

Default: 0

Range: 0–22

Format: Numeric

Description

The end-to-end connection protocol used.

For MD DS1 module configuration, select the X value.

Note: DBCES is only available when channelization and signalling are enabled on the X window.

Identifies available range for field value when applicable

Identifies field value format as

Numeric, Predefined,

Hexadecimal, Alphanumeric

Describes special instructions or configuration constraints

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

1-6

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 1 Getting Started

General Navigational Guidelines

Selecting Options, Fields, and Commands Using the Console Interface

Follow these guidelines to select an option, field, or command on the PSAX console interface windows and to navigate through the windows:

• To select an option, field, or command , do one of the following:

~ Press the Up, Down, Left, or Right Arrow to highlight (reverse video image) the option name, field name, or command you want to select and press Enter.

~ Use the alternate keys, K=UP, H=LEFT, L=RIGHT to highlight (reverse video image) the option name, field name, or command you want to select and press Enter. (You can optionally redefine these alternate keys from the User Options window, which is accessible from the Console

Interface Main Menu window.)

~ To quickly select a command, you can also simultaneously press Ctrl and the letter underlined in the command.

Once an option name, field, or command is selected, the system responds as described in Table 1-4.

Table 1-4. System Responses to Selecting Options, Fields, or Commands

For a selected...

the following occurs: option name The window corresponding to the option name is displayed.

field command

The following variations occur:

• The field entry area is blank or contains the default or previously entered value. Press Enter to enter or change data in this field. Press

Enter again to exit edit mode.

• The field entry area, like the field name, is displayed in reverse video image and contains a predefined set of values, which you can view or select by pressing Enter to navigate forward through these values. To navigate backward through these field values, press Ctrl+H or the

Backspace key.

Read-only fields, which you cannot change, are enclosed in square brackets (example: [LineStatus]).

The following variations occur:

• A message in the information line indicating an error or successful completion of the command is displayed.

• The next higher level or previous window ( window name ) is displayed.

• The next lower level or succeeding window ( window name ) is displayed.

• To navigate through the Console windows , use the shortcuts listed in

Table 1-5.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

1-7

Chapter 1 Getting Started

General Navigational Guidelines

Table 1-5. Shortcut Keys for Navigating Console Interface Windows

If you want to...

redisplay the previous window redisplay the Console Interface Main Menu window refresh the window press...

Ctrl+B on the window.

Ctrl+G on the window.

Ctrl+R on the window.

On all the PSAX system windows, each command or menu option has an underlined letter. The control key plus an underlined letter is a shortcut to that command or menu option. You can use the navigation keys and hotkeys with the Caps Lock key on or off. Always observe the status line at the bottom of the window for instructions and information.

Selecting Menu Options and Fields in the AQueView GUI

Follow these guidelines to select a menu option or field in the AQueView GUI windows and to navigate through the windows:

• For AQueView procedures, instructions using the term “click” mean to press the left mouse button. The term “right-click” means to press the right mouse button.

Note: If you have a mouse with three buttons, you will not need to use the middle mouse button to navigate the AQueView GUI.

• When multiple menu options are displayed in a procedural step, select the menu options or click the appropriate buttons in succession as described in

Table 1-6.

Table 1-6. Selecting Multiple Menu Options or Buttons in Succession

If you encounter a step in a procedure to select multiple...

menu options in succession, such as the step “Select Start > Programs >

AQueView.” then do this..

Using the left mouse button: a Click the Start menu option buttons in succession, such as the step, “Click Apply > Close .” b Click the Programs menu option c Click the AQueView menu option

Using the left mouse button: a Click the Apply button.

b Click the Close button.

• Field values are displayed in three ways. To select a field, do one of the following methods to enter the desired values into the fields on a window in the AQueView GUI as described in Table 1-7.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

1-8

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Help Information

Table 1-7. How Fields Are Displayed in the AQueView GUI

For a field displayed as...

a combo box (it displays with a small triangle pointing downward) a blank box grey do this...

select the displayed value and a drop-down list will appear with additional values.

enter a valid value in the field by typing it.

view the information, which is read-only. You cannot edit values that display as grey in the AQueView GUI.

• To quickly select menu options from the AQueView Menu Bar, you can also simultaneously press keyboard combinations as described in Table 1-5.

Table 1-8. Shortcut Keys for Navigating the AQueView GUI

If you want to...

press...

display the File menu on the AQueView Menu

Bar

Alt+F

Alt+V display the View menu on the AQueView

Menu Bar display the Help menu on the AQueView

Menu Bar

Alt+H display the Open Device window display the Run Script window display the User List window display the Device List window display the User Properties window terminate the AQueView session

Ctrl+O

Ctrl+C

Ctrl+U

Ctrl+D

Ctrl+P

Alt+X and Alt+F4

Help Information

The Help windows are accessible from any window in the PSAX system console interface. To access the Help windows, press the ? (Question Mark) key on any window. In addition to the Help windows, the Console Interface windows display contextual help in the information line at the bottom of each window. Contextual help provides information about the command or field currently highlighted on that window. The information line also displays error codes and responses to commands. All responses and notifications are recorded in a trap log. See Appendix A in the appropriate PacketStar PSAX

Multiservice Media Gateway user guide for details on displaying the trap log and explanations of the trap messages.

To view the Help windows from the Console Interface Main Menu window, perform the following procedure.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

1-9

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Technical Support

Viewing and Navigating the Help Windows

Begin

1 On the window for which help is desired, press the ? (question mark) key.

The Help window for the current console window is displayed (see

Figure 1-1).

Your site name appears here after initial configuration

Information line

Figure 1-1. Main Menu Help Window

2 To display the remaining Help windows for the current console window, press the Down Arrow key.

3 To scroll backward through the Help windows for the current console window, press the Up Arrow key.

4 To exit Help and return to the current console window, press the Enter key.

End

Technical Support

If you experience a problem with your PSAX system, refer to the Lucent Technologies InterNetworking Systems Global Warranty , which accompanied your shipment, for instructions on obtaining support in your area.If you experience a problem with the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module,

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

1-10

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Before You Begin refer to the Lucent Technologies InterNetworking Systems Global Warranty , which accompanied your shipment, for instructions on obtaining support in your area.

Before You Begin

Before you start configuring and using your new 12-Port

Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module, be sure you:

• Record your site-specific specifications such as the IP addresses you will use, and the connections and interfaces you will need. Decide which user names and passwords you will assign.

• Make sure you have IP connectivity to all PSAX devices to be managed

• Determine the numbering scheme for the in-band connections you will be using

Comments on This Guide

To comment on the PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice

Module User Guide , please complete the comment card that accompanied your shipment and mail it to the following address:

Senior Manager, Information Design and Development Team

Lucent Technologies

PacketStar PSAX Products

8301 Professional Place

Landover, MD 20785

USA

You can also fax the comment card to us at: 301-809-4540.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

1-11

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Comments on This Guide

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

1-12

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Module Description

Overview of This Module

The 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module (see Figure 2-1) provides a line rate of 1.544 Mbps per port. Each port can be independently configured to provide for channelized and unchannelized frame relay configurations, circuit emulation service (CES), high-level data link control (HDLC) pass-through mode, integrated services digital network with a primary rate interface (ISDN PRI) service, and ATM services.

FAIL

ACTIVE

MD DS1

LOS

Figure 2-1. 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module

Capabilities

The functionality of the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module is based on the existing Channelized DS3 hardware, firmware, and software

(see the Packetstar

PSAX 1-Port Channelized DS3 Multiservice Module User

Guide ).

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

2-1

Chapter 2 Module Description

Overview of This Module

You can configure the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module to provide N x 64 Kbps (fractional T1) structured circuit emulation service.

When configured for DS1 circuit emulation service, the module interfaces with TDM channelized DS1 circuits. It converts channelized data (usually voice data) to ATM virtual channels. By using structured (channelized) circuit emulation, this module can adapt a maximum of 24 DS1channels per port to ATM virtual channels with individual virtual path identifiers (VPIs) and virtual channel identifiers (VCIs). Signaling bit transport is also provided, based on ATM Forum standards for channel-associated signalling

(CAS). With the 64 Kbps "clear channel" capability, this module can connect to a device using an ISDN PRI service. Because this structured circuit emulation service can be configured to use only a fraction of the time slots, you can configure several independent emulated circuits to share one service interface.

The 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module uses ATM Forum

Specification UNI 3.0 or UNI 3.1, which allows any DS1 port to act as a user network interface (UNI), an interim inter-switch protocol (IISP) user or network interface to an ATM network.

Connection Options

The 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module connects to user equipment via a standard Lucent cable (COMCODE 300550639) with an

RJ-48H connector. Typically, this cable is used to connect the module to one of the following PSAX Patch Panels within the same or an adjacent Telco frame:

• PSAX 24-Port RJ Patch Panel (impedance 100 ohms)

• PSAX 48-Port RJ Patch Panel (impedance 100 ohms).

The Lucent cable can be extended for short-haul links of up to 500 feet (with

6 dB cable loss) by connecting the Lucent cable to an Avaya cable (p/n

1010025AGY CUSTL, at -1.2 dB per 100 feet), or equivalent. Use RJ-48H connectors (for example, Cinch p/n 57-10500-271A and Cinch p/n

57-20500-7A) on the extension cable to link the Lucent cable to the

PSAX Patch Panels.

Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 show the connectors of two modules connected to a PSAX 24-Port RJ Patch Panel (COMCODE 300298551). This component is separately orderable.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

2-2

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 2 Module Description

Overview of This Module

PORT 13-24 PORT 1-12

PacketStar PSAX 120PP48

FAIL

ACTIVE

HD E1 HD E1

FAIL

ACTIVE

SERIAL

1 2

LOS

3 4

5 6

FAIL

ACTIVE

DS1

IMA

LOS

FAIL

ACTIVE

DS1

IMA

LOS

FAIL

ACTIVE

DS1

IMA

LOS

FAIL

ACTIVE

DS1

IMA

LOS

FAIL

ACTIVE

DS3

ATM

LOS

FAIL

ACTIVE

DS3

ATM

LOS

FAIL

ACTIVE

DS3

ATM

FAIL

ACTIVE

CPU2

ETHERNET

CONSOLE

LOAD

FAIL

ACTIVE

FAIL

ACTIVE

FAIL

ACTIVE

FAIL

ACTIVE

FAIL

ACTIVE

CPU2

ETHERNET

CONSOLE

LOAD

STRATUM

3 4

STRATUM

3 4

CLK LOS CLK LOS

Power Supply

(110V AC)

Model 20N04

WARNINGS: non-redundant

SEE INSTALLATION

INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE

CONNECTING THIS MODULE

DANGER: HIGH VOLTAGE

ENSURE FACILITY POWER

IS COMPATIBLE WITH

VOLTAGE RATING OF

THIS MODULE

ATTACH POWER

CORD ONLY

WHEN UNIT IS

FULLY SEATED

IN CHASSIS

UNPLUG POWER CORD

BEFORE REMOVING

THIS MODULE

MULTIPLE POWER

CONNECTIONS,

DISCONNECT TWO

POWER CORDS

BEFORE SERVICING

CHASSIS

Power Supply

(110V AC)

Model 20N04

WARNINGS: non-redundant

SEE INSTALLATION

INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE

CONNECTING THIS MODULE

DANGER: HIGH VOLTAGE

ENSURE FACILITY POWER

IS COMPATIBLE WITH

VOLTAGE RATING OF

THIS MODULE

ATTACH POWER

CORD ONLY

WHEN UNIT IS

FULLY SEATED

IN CHASSIS

UNPLUG POWER CORD

BEFORE REMOVING

THIS MODULE

MULTIPLE POWER

CONNECTIONS,

DISCONNECT TWO

POWER CORDS

BEFORE SERVICING

CHASSIS

RX RX RX

PSAX1250 FAN TRAY

Ports

1-12

Power Supply A

CAUTION: DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE

CHANGING FUSE. REPLACE ONLY WITH

FUSE OF SAME TYPE AND RATING.

Fuse A

-48 V

0.5 A 1.0A

ACTIVE

FAN FAIL

Non-redundant

Power Supply B

-48 V

0.5 A

CAUTION: DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE

CHANGING FUSE. REPLACE ONLY WITH

FUSE OF SAME TYPE AND RATING.

Fuse B

1.0A

ALARMS

Heat

Deflector

24-Port

Patch

Panel

1RU

Spacer

PSAX

1250

System

PSAX

1250

Fan Tray

Figure 2-2. 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Modules Connected to the

PSAX 24-Port RJ Patch Panel (Front View)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Figure 2-3. 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Modules Connected to the

PSAX 24-Port RJ Patch Panel (Back View)

You may also connect four 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice modules to a PSAX 48-Port RJ Patch Panel (COMCODE 300298544). See the

Packetstar

PSAX Patch Panels for PSAX Multiservice Media Gateways Installation

Guide for instructions.

Further connections to user equipment may be made per the specifications outlined in ANSI T1.403-1999. See Appendix A, “Pin Configurations,” for more details.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

2-3

Chapter 2 Module Description

Software Features

The 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module supports the following services:

• ATM: ATM UNI 3.0, 3.1, and 4.0; Interim inter-switch signaling protocol

(IISP) user, IISP network; PNNI 1.0

• CE: Circuit emulation service (CES) with ISDN PRI using 64 Kbps clear channel; 1 x 64 Kbps structured CAS; unstructured CES

• HDLC passthrough mode (N x 56 and N x 64)

• Frame relay UNI and NNI (FRF.1, FRF.2, FRF.5, and FRF.8)

• GR-303

• CAS Trunkline

• ITU-T I.370 (Frame relay policing)

• Congestion management

• Traffic policing

Hardware Features

The 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module provides the following hardware features:

• Number of ports: 12

• Connector type: one Mini-Champ connector

• Line rate: 1.544 Mbps

• Physical interfaces supported: ITU-T G.703, ITU G.704

• Line encoding mode: B8ZS, AMI

• Loopback capabilities: line loopback, local loopback

• Line buildout: Up to 133, 266, 399, 533, and 655 feet

• Framing mode: ESF, D4

Hardware Specifications

Table 2-1 shows the general physical and environmental hardware specifications for the PacketStar PSAX I/O and server modules.

Table 2-1. Physical Hardware Specifications

Dimensions

Specification

Weight

Operating temperature range for

AC-powered PSAX 1000,

AC/DC-powered PSAX 1250, and

DC-powered PSAX 2300/4500 systems

Description

17.3 cm H x 2.41 cm W x 23.2 cm D

(6.8 in. H x 0.95 in. W x 9.13 in. D)

0.45 kg (1.0 lb.)

0° to 50° C (32° to 122° F)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

2-4

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 2 Module Description

Hardware Features

Table 2-1. Physical Hardware Specifications (Continued)

Specification

Operating temperature range for

PSAX 1000 DC-powered systems

Operating humidity

Storage temperature

Description

-20° to 60° C (-4° to 140° F)

5% to 85% relative humidity

-40° to 70° C (-40° to 158° F)

Chassis Speed, Power Consumption, and Memory Allocation

Table 2-2 describes the chassis speed, power consumption, and memory allocation specifications for this module.

Table 2-2. Performance and Power Specifications for the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice

ModulePerformance and Power Specifications for the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1

Multiservice Module

Module

12-Port Medium-

Density DS1

Multiservice ( MD DS1 )

Total

Amount of

SDRAM

24 MB

Module

Program and

Data Space

Maximum

Input

Buffer

7 MB 4 MB

Output

Buffer

13 MB

(212,992)

Chassis

Speed

Low

Speed

Power

Consumption

14.5 W

1 The I/O buffers carry 16,384 cells per megabyte.

2 Indicates the size of the output buffer followed by the maximum number of 64-byte cells in the output buffer.

3 This column relates only to the speed at which the modules communicate within the chassis. A highspeed module will communicate at high speed (1.23 Gbps) in a chassis that has a high-speed bus

(PSAX 4500 chassis). High-speed modules will communicate at 650 Mbps in any other chassis. Lowspeed modules will always communicate at 650 Mbps in any chassis.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

2-5

Chapter 2 Module Description

Hardware Features

LED Indicators

Table 2-3 describes how the light-emitting diode (LED) indicators on the

12-Port Medium-Density DS1 module faceplate respond to different module conditions. These LEDs indicate if the module has been installed properly.

Table 2-3. LED Indicators for the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice

Module

Status

Initial

Power-On

Configured

Ports

One or

More

Configured

Ports

No Cable on

Port

Cable on

Port

LED

FAIL

(red)

ACTIVE

(green)

Lights briefly

Not lit

Lights only when the module is not functioning

N/A

Lights only when the module is functioning properly

N/A

LOS

[Loss of

Signal]

(yellow)

Lights briefly 2

N/A N/A Lights • Does not light if signal is being received

• Lights if signal is missing

Note: After power is initially applied to the system and the system boot is complete, the FAIL and ACTIVE LEDs indicate whether the module has no configured ports (red), or one or more configured ports (green).

Note: After power is initially applied to the system and the system boot is complete, this loss of signal LED indicates whether the port has a cable connected to it.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

2-6

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Part 2: Console Operation

Configuring Ports and Channels

Using the Console Interface

Overview of This Chapter

This chapter describes how to use the console interface to perform the following tasks:

• Setting the values for the port and channel configuration of the 12-Port

Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module

• Viewing the port statistics

• Saving the module configuration and logging off

Before You Begin

Be sure to complete the following tasks first before configuring the 12-Port

Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module:

• Configure your basic system (see “Configuring the System for Your Site” in the appropriate PacketStar PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway user guide).

• Configure the Stratum 3–4 module (see “Configuring the Stratum 3–4

Module” in the appropriate PacketStar PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway user guide).

When configuring the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module using the console interface, display-only fields are displayed in square brackets ([ ]).

Loopback Configuration Options

To aid network troubleshooting and testing, loopback capability is provided for the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module. The loopback option on the module port and channel configuration window for the module enables you to verify the integrity of a port by transmitting a received signal back to the source. Selecting a loopback option is described in the module configuration procedure provided in this chapter.

Figure 3-1 illustrates the line loop, payload loop, and local loop options.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

3-1

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Obtaining General Module Data and Accessing Ports and Channels

Line Loop

Line Driver

Payload Loop

Signal

Port Connector

Receiver

Port

Connector

Local Loop

Line Driver

Backplane

Connector

Framing Chip

Backplane

Connector

Receiver

Backplane

Connector

Figure 3-1. Loopback Configuration Options on the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1

Multiservice Module

Obtaining General Module Data and Accessing Ports and

Channels

This section describes how to obtain product, model, version, and serial number data about a module from the Equipment Configuration window. You also use this window to access the port and channel configuration windows for the PSAX modules.

Accessing the Equipment Configuration Window

Begin

1 On the Console Interface Main Menu window, select the Equipment

Configuration option.

The Equipment Configuration window is displayed (see Figure 3-2 through Figure 3-6). The commands and fields on this window are described in the tables following the figures.

2 View the module status, software version, PEC, and serial number data.

3 When you are ready to begin configuring the ports and channels of the module, select the line displaying the name of the module you want to configure.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

3-2

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Obtaining General Module Data and Accessing Ports and Channels

End

Note: Proceed to the section, “Configuring the Ports,” for module configuration procedures.The sample Equipment Configuration windows in the following figures may not show the actual module you are configuring. These figures illustrate the variations of slot configurations for the different PSAX chassis displayed on the

Equipment Configuration window.

Figure 3-2. Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 1000 System

(Page 1)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

3-3

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Obtaining General Module Data and Accessing Ports and Channels

Figure 3-3.

Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 1250 System

(Page 1)

Figure 3-4. Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 2300 or

PSAX 4500 System (Page 1)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

3-4

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Obtaining General Module Data and Accessing Ports and Channels

Figure 3-5. Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 1000,

PSAX 2300, or PSAX 4500 System (Page 2)

Commands

Figure 3-6.

Sample Equipment Configuration Window on a PSAX 1250 System

(Page 2)

The commands on this window have the following functions.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

3-5

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Obtaining General Module Data and Accessing Ports and Channels

Command Function

Update Equipment Display Refreshes the current status of the modules in the PSAX chassis

Page Down

Page Up

Displays the second page of the Equipment Configuration window.

Displays the first page of the Equipment

Configuration window.

Go Back to Main Menu Redisplays the Console Interface Main

Menu window.

The display-only fields on this window are described in Table 3-1.

Table 3-1. Field Descriptions for the Equipment Configuration Window

Slot

Field Name

Card Type

Status

Field Values Description

Default: N/A

Range: 1–25, depending on chassis type

Format: Numeric

Indicates the slot number in the PSAX chassis.

Default: N/A

Range: from PSAX system database

Format: Predefined alphanumeric alphanumeric

Default: Unknown

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Unknown

Primary

Standby

Indicates the type of the module in the slot.

When a module is inserted into the chassis, its name is displayed in the Card Type field next to the slot number. When the module is removed from the chassis, its name is no longer displayed in the Card Type field and is replaced with None .

Displays the operational status of the module.

Indicates that the module has not been configured.

For an I/O or server module, indicates that at least one port or channel on the module has been configured.

For a CPU module, indicates that this module is the primary CPU module.

Indicates that the module, in redundant systems, is operating as the standby (backup) module to the primary module.

Indicates, for the CPU module in redundant systems, that this module is the standby (backup)

CPU module.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

3-6

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Obtaining General Module Data and Accessing Ports and Channels

Table 3-1. Field Descriptions for the Equipment Configuration Window (Continued)

Field Name

Alarm Status

SW Version

PEC

Serial #

Field Values

Default: No Alarm

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Description

Displays the present alarm condition of the module. For the alarm status conditions, see the table

“Alarm Status Descriptions” following these field descriptions.

Default: N/A

Range: (from module firmware)

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Displays the version of PSAX system software with which the modules’ firmware was released.

The software version is encoded in the module firmware. Because not all modules require firmware upgrades with every new PSAX system software release, the software version that is displayed in this window may be lower than the

CPU system software that is currently running on the PSAX system. See the most recent Release

Note document for the latest software and firmware lineup information.

Default: N/A

Range: from module firmware

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Displays the product element code (PEC) used to identify and order this type of module. The PEC is encoded in the module firmware.

Default: N/A

Range: (from module firmware)

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Displays the unique serial number of the individual module. The product serial number is encoded in the module firmware. The format of this field is the following:

PSAX System Rel. 6.5.0 and later: 12-digit number in the format: YYVVDDnnnnnn , where

YY = year of manufacture

VV = vendor ID code (manufacturer and location)

DD = date code of manufacture (either month or week depending on vendor’s preference) nnnnnn = sequential number, which in conjunction with YY , VV , and DD , creates a unique number for each hardware component in the PSAX product line

For existing products with the 10-digit serial number used in Rel. 6.5.0 or later systems, this number is displayed with two preceding zeros.

PSAX Rel. 6.3.0 and earlier: 10-digit number. For products with 12-digit serial numbers used in

Rel. 6.3.0 or earlier systems, the first two digits

( YY ) are not displayed.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

3-7

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

The alarm status descriptions for the Alarm Status field on the Equipment

Configuration window are provided in Table 3-2. When underscored numbers are displayed in this field, they represent one or more ports on the module that currently have a loss of signal.

Table 3-2. Alarm Status Descriptions for Modules on the Equipment Configuration Window

Number

Alarm Status

NoAlarm

WrongCardType

LineFailed

CardRemoved

ReferenceClockFailed

CompositeClockFailed

Overload

Plus5vFailed

Plus120vFailed

Minus48vFailed

UnknownAlarm

CompleteClockFailed

PowerFailed

Module Type

Affected

I/O

Description

I/O

All

NoAlarm indicates that the module is inserted in the chassis slot and not configured.

One type of module was configured in this slot in the chassis, but a different module now occupies this slot.

The line has failed.

A module has been configured and then removed.

Stratum

The timing reference clock has failed.

The timing composite clock has failed.

Power Supply The Power Supply is operating under an overload condition.

Power Supply The 5 V dc Power Supply output has failed.

Power Supply The 120 V ac Power Supply input has failed.

Power Supply The -48 V dc Power Supply output has failed.

I/O The reason for failure is not known.

Stratum The backplane has detected a clock error.

Power Supply Power failed

Configuring the Module

You must first configure the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module before you can set up connection provisioning. To configure the 12-Port

Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module ports, follow the steps in the following procedure.

Configuring the Ports

Configuring Medium-

Density DS1 Ports

Configuring the Ports

Begin

1 On the Console Interface Main Menu window (see Figure 3-7), select the

Equipment Configuration option and press Enter.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

3-8

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

Figure 3-7. Console Interface Main Menu (Equipment Configuration Selected)

The Equipment Configuration window (see Figure 3-8) is displayed.

Figure 3-8. Equipment Configuration Window (As Displayed on the PSAX 1250,

PSAX 2300, and PSAX 4500 Console)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

3-9

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

2 On the Equipment Configuration window, select the MD-DS1 module in the list and press Enter.

The Medium-Density DS1 Configuration window (see Figure 3-9) is displayed.

Commands

Figure 3-9. Medium-Density DS1 Configuration Window

The commands in this window have the following functions:

Command

Update Display

Delete All Interfaces

Go to H.248 TID

Configuration

Function

Updates the values in the fields to show the most current configuration. Use this command mostly to display the most current information in the Line Status field.

Deletes the configured interfaces for all the ports. The value 0 is displayed in the

# Channels Configured field. You must first take all interfaces out of service

(using the Take All Interfaces Out Of

Service command) before you can use this command to delete all the configured interfaces.

Displays the Termination ID Configuration window. This command appears only when H.248 Configuration is enabled.

Refer to the Packetstar H.248 Media Gateway

Control User Guide .

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

3-10

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

Command

Bring All Interfaces Into

Service

Take All Interfaces Out Of

Service

Go Back to Equipment Configuration

Function

Brings the out-of-service configured interfaces for all the ports to in-service status.

The number of interfaces in service is displayed in the # Interfaces In Service field for all the ports.

Takes the in-service configured interfaces for all the ports to out-of-service status.

The value 0 is displayed in the # Interfaces

In Service field for all six ports. You must use this command first before using the

Delete All Interfaces command.

Redisplays the Equipment Configuration window.

3 Select one of the lines with the port you want to configure and press

Enter. The Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration window (see Figure 3-10) is displayed.

Commands

Figure 3-10. Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window

The commands in this window have the following functions:

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

3-11

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

Field Descriptions

Command

Show Straps

Apply Port Configuration

Reset Display

View Port Statistics

Go to H.248 TID

Configuration

Delete All Interfaces On

This Port

Bring All Interfaces Into

Service

Take All Interfaces Out Of

Service

Go Back to Card Configuration

Function

Displays the Medium-Density DS1 DS0s

Strap Display window.

For a specified port number value, applies the port configuration field values you set.

Resets the port configuration fields to the last set of saved values.

Displays the Medium-Density DS1 Port

Statistics window.

Displays the Termination ID Configuration window. This command appears only when H.248 Configuration is enabled.

Refer to the Packetstar H.248 Media Gateway

Control User Guide .

Deletes the configured interface and sets the channel to unconfigured status. The value Unconfigured is displayed in the

Chnl Status field.

Note: You must first take the interface that is in-service to out-of-service (using the Take All Interfaces Out Of Service command) before you can use this command.

Brings the out-of-service configured interface for the channel to in-service status.

An asterisk is displayed beside all the configured channels indicating that they are in service.

Note: You must first configure the interface before you can use this command.

Takes the in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. The displayed asterisk is removed from all configured channels indicating that they are out of service.

Note: You must use this command first before using the Delete All interfaces

On This Port command.

Redisplays the Medium-Density DS1 Configuration window.

4 Enter values in the fields on this window according to the information provided in Table 3-3.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

3-12

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

Table 3-3. Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window

Field Name

Line Type

[Line Coding]

(display only)

Loopback

Default: Esf

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Esf

Default: B8ZS

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

B8ZS

Ami

Field Values

Default: NoLoop

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

NoLoop

LocalLoop

Description

Indicates the framing mode to be used on this port.

Extended Super Frame DS1 format.

D4 format. Channels are assigned sequentially.

Indicates the type of line coding to be used on this port. (The data format that lets either end of the communications channel correctly interpret messages from the other.)

Bipolar with 8 zero substitution. Use of a specified pattern of normal bits and bipolar violations to replace sequence of 8 zero bits.

Alternate mark inversion. Indicates zero code suppression.

Indicates whether the port is to be used for loopback testing and, if so, the type of loopback to be performed.

LineLoop

PayloadLoop

The port will not be used for loopback.

Local loopback will be used on this port. The signal will be received from another module in the chassis, sent through the module circuitry

(including the segmentation and reassembly

(SAR) function) and the chassis backplane to the originating module.

Line loop will be used on this port. The received signal will be sent through the receiver and the line driver, and then back out to the originating point.

The received signal is sent through the framing chip on the module, but not on the SAR circuitry, and then back out to the originating point. The data link is regenerated.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

3-13

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

Table 3-3. Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window

Field Name

Transmit Clock

Field Values

Default: LocalTiming

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

LocalTiming

Description

Indicates the timing source to be used on this port. The timing source is a signal that provides a timing reference for a transmission link.

Line Build Out

LoopTiming

Adaptive Timing

Local clock source will be used as the timing source.

Recovered receive clock is used as the timing source.

Monitors the port buffers to increase or decrease the transmission rate. Displays when the port is configured as Unstructured in the Data Transfer

Type field.

Indicates the selectable output attenuation.

Default: UpTo133

Feet

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

UpTo133Feet

UpTo266Feet

UpTo399Feet

UpTo533Feet

UpTo655Feet negative7-5Db negative15Db negative22-5Db

Indicates the DS1 signal is designed to be valid from 0 to 133 f eet

Indicates the DS1 signal is designed to be valid from 134 to 266 feet

Indicates the DS1 signal is designed to be valid from 267 to 399 feet

Indicates the DS1 signal is designed to be valid from 400 to 533 feet

Indicates the DS1 signal is designed to be valid from 534 to 655 feet

Indicates the T1 signal level range at which the

DS1 is configured is negative 7.5 dB

Indicates the T1 signal level range at which the

DS1 is configured is negative 15 dB

Indicates the T1 signal level range at which the

DS1 is configured is negative 22.5 dB

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

3-14

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

Table 3-3. Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window

Field Name Field Values

Data Tx Type (Data

Transfer Type)

Default: Structured

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Structured

Description

Indicates whether this port has structured or unstructured interfaces.

Channelization

Unstructured

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Disabled

Enabled

UpStrmIntrworking Default: TrunkCond

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

TrunkCond

Unframed1s

Indicates that this port has structured unchannelized and channelized interfaces.

Indicates that this port has unstructured (and unchannelized) interfaces.

Note: When you select this value, the Line Type,

Channelization, UpStrmIntrworking, and T1 Signaling fields are not displayed.

Indicates whether the DS1 port is divided into 24 channels.

Note: When you select the value Unstructured in the Data Tx Type field, the Channelization field is not displayed.

Indicates that the division of the DS1 port into 24 channels is disabled. Use this setting if you want to set up only one channel for the port. When you select the Apply Port Configuration command, only channel 1 displays the value Unconfigured .

Indicates that the division of the DS1 port into 24 channels is enabled. Use this setting if you want to set up more than one channel for the port.

Displays the communications mode selected between the CE and ATM sides of a connection on this port during alarm conditions.

Note: When you select the value Unstructured in the Data Tx Type field, the UpStrmInterworking field is display only, showing the value

Unframed1s .

Indicates that trunk conditioning will be done for each channel of this port whose corresponding

ATM side is alarmed. This improves the communication of the trunk status for TDM traffic. See the PacketStar PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway

Trunk Conditioning Application Note for more details.

Indicates that a sequence of Unframed All 1s will be transmitted to the CES end point whenever there is an alarm on the ATM side for any CE to

ATM connection on this port.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

3-15

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

Table 3-3. Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window

Field Name

T1 Signaling

SG Feature

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Disabled

Enabled

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Disabled

Description

Displays the status of T1 signaling.

Note: When you select the value Unstructured in the Data Tx Type field, the T1 Signaling field is display only, showing the value Disabled .

Indicates that T1 signaling is disabled.

Indicates that T1 signaling is enabled.

Displays the status of the connection gateway feature.

[Line Status]

(display only)

Enabled

Default: NoAlarm

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Indicates that the connection gateway feature is disabled. See the PacketStar

Connection Gateway

API Specification for more details.

Indicates that the connection gateway feature is enabled.

Indicates the status of the line: NoAlarm ,

LossOfSignal , or one of several alarms. See the bit map tables for the DS1 modules in the ”SNMP

Trap Messages” appendix in the appropriate PacketStar PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway user guide, Release 6.0.0 or higher.

5 To configure channels, perform one of the following procedures: a. To configure the port as one channel, you must have selected the value Disabled in the Channelization field (see Table 3-3). Continue with instructions in “Configuring a Port with One Channel”.

b. To configure several channels for a port, you must have selected the value Enabled in the Channelization field (see Table 3-3). Continue with instructions in “Configuring a Port with Several Channels” on page 3-20.

End

Configuring a Port with One Channel

Begin

To configure one or more ports on the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module with only one channel for a port, use the following procedure:

1 Select Chnl 1 Unconfigured on the Medium-Density DS1 Port and

Channel Configuration window (see Figure 3-10), and press Enter.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

3-16

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

Note: You must have selected the value Disabled in the Channelization field on the Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration window (see Figure 3-10).

The Medium-Density DS1 Channel Configuration (see Figure 3-11) is displayed.

Commands

Figure 3-11. Medium-Density DS1 Channel Configuration Window (One Channel per Port)

The commands in this window have the following functions:

Command Function

Apply Configuration For a specified port and channel number value, applies the interface configuration you selected.

Resets the fields to the last set of saved values.

Reset Display

Go to H.248 TID

Configuration

Bring Interface Into

Service

Displays the Termination ID Configuration window. This command appears only when H.248

Configuration is enabled. Refer to the Packetstar

H.248 Media Gateway Control User Guide .

Brings the out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value InService is displayed in the [Oper Status] and the [Admin Status] fields.

Take Interface Out Of

Service

Takes the in-service configured interface to outof-service status. The value OutOfService is displayed in the [Oper Status] and the [Admin

Status] fields.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

3-17

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

Command

Configure Interface

Go Back to Port Configuration

Function

Displays an interface configuration window for the selected interface.

Redisplays the Medium Density DS1 Port and

Channel Configuration window.

Field Descriptions 2 Enter values in the fields on this window according to the information provided in Table 3-4.

Table 3-4. Field Descriptions for the Medium Density DS1 Channel Configuration Window

Field Name

[Slot: nn]

(display only)

Port: nn

Channel: nnn

Interface Type

Field Values

Default: N/A

Range: Variable

Format: Numeric

Default: N/A

Range: 1-12

Format: Numeric

Default: 001

Range: 001-024

Format: Numeric

Default:

Unconfigured

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

AtmUni3-0

AtmUni3-1

AtmUni4-0

IispUser

IispNetwork

CircuitEmulation

FrameRelay

Uni

HldcPassThrough

Pri-isdn-network

FrameRelay

Nni

Pri-isdn-user

AtmPnni 1-0

Gr303

CasTrunkLine

This interface for the port is configured with one of the interface types in the preceding column.

Note: The CasTrunkLine interface type is only available when Channelization is Enabled for the port.

Description

The PSAX chassis slot that the selected module occupies.

The physical port on the module.

Indicates the channel selected.

Note: Only channel 001 is available when channelization is disabled.

Indicates the type of end-to-end connection protocol that governs the transmission parameters of the configured channel interface. Interface types can be configured only if ports exist in the group.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

3-18

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

Table 3-4. Field Descriptions for the Medium Density DS1 Channel Configuration Window

Field Name

Cell Scramble

(displays for the

ATM interface types)

Signaling (displays for the CE and Priisdn interface types)

[Admin Status]

(display only)

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Character

Disabled

Enabled

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Character

Disabled

Enabled

Default:

Unconfigured

Range: N/A

Format: predefined character

Unconfigured

InService

Description

Indicates cell scrambling status on the ATM interface.

Indicates that cell scrambling is disabled.

Indicates that cell scrambling is enabled

Indicates signaling status on the CircuitEmulation and Pri-isdn interfaces.

Indicates that signaling is disabled.

Indicates that signaling is enabled

Displays the administrative status of the channel.

[Oper Status] (display only)

OutOfService

The interface for the channel is not configured.

The interface has been brought into service with the Bring Interface Into Service command.

The interface has not yet been brought into service, or its in-service interface has been set to out of service with the Take Interface Out of Service command.

Displays the operational status of the channel and whether the channel is exchanging a valid signal.

Default:

Unconfigured

Range: N/A

Format: predefined character

Unconfigured

[Available DS0s]:

(display only)

[DS0s Strapped]

(display only)

InService

OutOfService

Default:

Range: 01-24

Format: numeric

Default:

N/A

Range: 01-24

Format: numeric

This channel is not operational because the interface is not configured.

The configured interface is currently operational

(that is, capable of receiving and sending signals).

The configured interface is not currently operational (that is, not capable of receiving and sending signals) because there is no connection.

Indicates the number of unchecked DS0s available to be strapped to a particular channel. DS0s are only available when channelization is enabled.

Indicates the number of checked DS0s strapped to a particular channel. When channelization is disabled, all 24 DS0s are strapped to channel 001 .

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

3-19

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

3 In the Interface Type field, press Enter to select an interface type.

Another field appears when you make the following selections:

Interface Type

AtmUni3-0

AtmUni3-1

AtmPnni1-0

CircuitEmulation

Pri-isdn-network

Pri-isdn-user

Field

Cell Scramble

Signaling

4 In the Signaling or Cell Scramble field, press Enter to select either

Disabled (default) or Enabled .

5 Select the Apply Configuration command and press Enter.

6 Select the Bring Interface Into Service command and press Enter.

7 Select the Configure Interface command and press Enter. The status bar reads New Configuration: all connections for channel will be lost. Continue? (y/n) .

8 Press Y . An interface configuration window is displayed for the interface type selected.

See Chapter 4, “Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console,” for a description of this window.

9 Repeat steps 1-8 under “Configuring a Port with One Channel” for the remainder of the ports, as needed.

Note: Be sure to complete the module port and channel configuration and then the interface configuration for each port before beginning the configuration of a new port.

10 You can save the values permanently to the Multiservice Media Gateway system database now, or before you exit the current session of the Multiservice Media Gateway system console interface. See “Saving the Equipment Configuration and Logging Off” on page 3-26.

End

Configuring a Port with Several

Channels

Configuring a Port with Several Channels

Begin

To configure one or more ports on the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module with several DS0s strapped together in one channel and several channels for a port, use the following procedure:

1 Select Chnl 1 Unconfigured on the Medium-Density DS1 Port and

Channel Configuration window (see Figure 3-10), and press Enter.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

3-20

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

Note: You must have selected the value Enabled in the Channelization field on the Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration window (see Figure 3-10).

The Medium-Density DS1 Channel Configuration window (see

Figure 3-12) is displayed.

Figure 3-12. Medium-Density DS1 Channel Configuration Window (Several

Channels per Port)

See page 3-17 for a description of the commands and fields in this window.

2 In the Interface Type field, press Enter to select an interface type.

Another field appears when you make the following selections:

Interface Type

AtmUni3-0

AtmUni3-1

AtmPnni1-0

CircuitEmulation

Pri-isdn-network

Pri-isdn-user

Cell Scramble

Signaling

Field

3 In the Signaling or Cell Scramble field, press Enter to select either

Disabled (default) or Enabled .

4 In the [Available DS0s] field, move the cursor to value 01 (indicates DS0

1) and press Enter to display x below DS0 01 .

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

3-21

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

5 Move the cursor to the next DS0 value and press Enter to display x below the DS0 value. Select as many DS0s as you want to strap together for the selected channel.

6 Select the Apply Configuration command and press Enter.

In the [DS0s Strapped] field (display only), the values for the DS0s you just selected are displayed. This first group of strapped DS0s are now shown as Channel 1 on the Port and Channel Configuration window, which you can view at any time.

7 To strap together more DS0s for another channel in the selected port, reselect the Channel field and enter the next channel number, for example, 002 . The status bar reads

New Configuration: all connections for channel will be lost. Continue? (y/n).

8 Press Y. An interface configuration window is displayed for the interface type selected.

See Chapter 4, “Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console,” for a description of this window.

9 Repeat steps 2-8 for the rest of the available DS0s (or as many as you want to use).

Note: Be sure to complete the module port and channel configuration and then the interface configuration for each port before beginning the configuration of a new port.

10 To view the strapped DS0s and their associated channels at any time, select the Show Straps command on the Medium Density DS1 Port and

Channel Configuration window (see Figure 3-10).

The Medium-Density DS1 DS0s Strap window (see Figure 3-13) displays.

Figure 3-13. Medium-Density DS1 DS0s Strap Display Window

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

3-22

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Commands

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

The strapped DS0s you set up are displayed next to their associated channels.

The commands in this window have the following functions:

Command

Update Display

Function

Resets the fields to the last set of saved values.

Go Back to DS1 Port Configuration

Redisplays the Port Configuration window.

Field Descriptions The display-only fields in this window are described in Table 3-5.

Table 3-5. Field Descriptions for the DS0s Strap Display Window

Field Name

[Slot: XX]

(display only)

Port: XX

DS0s

Field Values

Range: Variable

Description

Indicates the PSAX chassis slot that the selected module occupies.

Range: 1-28 for

Channelized DS3

Module

Range: 1-6 for

Enhanced DS1 Module

Range: 1-12 for

Medium Density DS1

Module

Indicates the port selected.

Range: 1-24

Indicates the channel selected.

Note: Only channel 1 is available when channelization is disabled.

Indicates DS0s strapped to a particular channel.

When channelization is disabled, all 24 DS0s are strapped to channel 1 .

End

Viewing Port Statistics

Viewing Port Statistics

Begin

To view statistics for this port, select the View Port Statistics command on the Medium Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration window (see

Figure 3-10) and press Enter. The Medium-Density DS1 Port Statistics window (see Figure 3-14) is displayed.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

3-23

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

Commands

Figure 3-14. Medium-Density DS1 Port Statistics Window

The commands in this window have the following functions:

Command

Continuous Update

Reset Statistics

Go Back to Port Configuration

Function

Updates the values in the fields every second.

Sets all field values to 0 .

Redisplays the Medium Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration window.

Field Descriptions

The display-only fields for this window are described in Table 3-6

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

3-24

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Configuring the Module

Table 3-6. Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port Statistics Window

Field Names

Errored Seconds

(display only)

Severely Errored

Seconds

(display only)

Severely Errored

Framing Seconds

(display only)

Unavailable Seconds

(display only)

Values

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Description

An errored second with at least one of the following:

Path Code Violations

Controlled Slip events

A detected AIS defect

Presence of Bipolar Violations.

An errored second with at least one of the following:

320 or more Path Code Violation Error events

Out of Frame defects

A detected AIS defect

A count of one-second intervals with Framing error events, an OOF defect, or a minimum of

1544 LCVs.

A second with one or more Out of Frame defects or an AIS defect.

A period of unavailable time begins when the bit error rate (BER) in each second is worse than 10 exp -3 for a period of 10 consective seconds.

These 10 seconds are considered to be unavailable time.

A one second intercal containing one or more controlled slips.

Controlled Slip Seconds

(display only)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Path Coding Violations

(display only)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

(seconds)

A frame synchronization bit error in the D4 and

DS1-noCRC formats, or a CRC error in the ESF and the DS1-CRC formats.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

3-25

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Saving the Equipment Configuration and Logging Off

Table 3-6. Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port Statistics Window

Field Names

Line Errored

Seconds

(display only)

Bursty Errored

Seconds

(display only)

Line Coding

Violations

(display only)

Values

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: seconds

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: seconds

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: seconds

Description

A second in which one or more Line Code Violation error events were detected.

A second with fewer than 320 and more than 1

Path Coding Violation error events, no Severely

Errored Frame Defects and no detected incoming

AIS defects. Controlled slips are not included in this parameter. This is not incremented during an

Unavailable Second.

A Bipolar Violation or Excessive Zeroes Error

Event has occurred.

Saving the Equipment Configuration and Logging Off

After configuring the module ports and channels, the interface types for each port and channel, and the connections, you must save the values to the

PSAX system database. It is recommended that you save your values frequently as you progress through your work, at a minimum, after finishing each stage of work:

• Configuring each module in your system

• Configuring the connections in your system

• Before exiting your current console session

Perform the following procedure to permanently save the values for your system.

CAUTION:

If your system or location loses power or your current session ends abnormally while you are in the process of configuring the system, and you have not yet saved the values permanently, you will lose all unsaved values you have applied on the various windows.

Returning to the Console Interface Main Menu

Begin

1 To return to the Console Interface Main Menu window, press Ctrl+G.

On the Console Interface Main Menu window, [Modified] is displayed next to the Save Configuration command, indicating you have made changes to your system that are not yet saved to the database.

2 Select the Save Configuration command.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

3-26

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Saving the Equipment Configuration and Logging Off

3 Select the Leave Console Interface command.

You are now logged off the PSAX system console interface.

End

Wait a few seconds while the system writes the values to the PSAX system database. The system displays the following message while it is executing this command:

Saving the equipment and connection information

When this function is completed, the system displays the following message:

T-SaveConfiguration: saveConfigurationReasonCode=All-OK

You can now safely exit the current session.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

3-27

Chapter 3 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the Console Interface

Saving the Equipment Configuration and Logging Off

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

3-28

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Configuring the Interfaces Using the

Console Interface

Overview of This Chapter

This chapter provides instructions for configuring the following interface types for the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module:

• ATM interswitch signaling protocol (IISP) user

• ATM interswitch signaling protocol (IISP) network

• ATM private network-network interface (PNNI) 1.0

• ATM user-network interface (UNI) 3.0, 3.1, and 4.0

• CAS Trunkline

• Circuit emulation

• Frame relay user-network interface (UNI)

• Frame relay network-network interface (NNI)

• GR-303

• High-level data link (HDLC) passthrough

• Primary rate interface (PRI) Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) network

• Primary rate interface (PRI) Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) user

Before You Begin

Before you can set interface configuration values, you must have selected an interface type value other than Unconfigured in the Interface Type field on the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module’s Port and Channel configuration window.

Note: For a matrix of interface types by PSAX I/O module types, see the

Interface Types by I/O Module Types table in the appendix, “Reference Information.”

Avoiding Common Errors When Configuring Interfaces

An error may occur when you apply an interface to channel. If an error condition occurs, the PSAX system sends an SNMP trap that is usually displayed in the console Trap Log Display window (accessible from the Console Interface Main Menu window). The list below includes the most common interface errors that cause the PSAX system to display a message. (See the appendix, “SNMP Trap Messages,” in the appropriate PacketStar PSAX Multiservice

Media Gateways user guide for more information about the SNMP traps related to interface errors).

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-1

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Optimizing SVC Call Performance

• Entering field values that are outside of the configurable range of values

• Attempting to configure an interface for a port or channel that has already been configured

• Attempting to configure an interface that is already in service (must be out of service to be configured or change field values)

• Entering field values that are not recognized by the PSAX system software

Optimizing SVC Call Performance

The information in this section provides guidance on optimizing call performance when configuring SVCs on the PNNI interface. The servicespecific connection-oriented protocol (SSCOP) parameter is set on these interface configuration windows: ATM IISP network or IISP user, ATM

UNI 3.0 or UNI 3.1, or ATM PNNI 1.0.

Note: These settings are suggested for connecting to a PSAX system from a remote site only. The PSAX system configures these settings internally in its own ATM switch.

When unacknowledged protocol data units (PDUs), the MaxPD field on the remote end peer (such as the NavisCore ™ CBX 500 ™ ) shows the maximum number of SSCOP packets transmitted since the last PSAX polling of the peer.

To optimize call performance, the SSCOP Rx Window Size field of the local

ATM interface should be less than the maximum value displayed in the

MaxPD credit window at the remote end of the ATM interface. Otherwise, the rate at which switched calls can be set and released may be degraded.

On the ATM IISP Interface Configuration window, the maximum credit window (the SSCOP Rx Window Size field) is configurable with a value up to

32 for all ATM interfaces on the PSAX system. The interfaces of the ATM switches that are connected to the PSAX system should be configured with the same values. This method results in 100 percent call completion at a call setup rate of 60 calls per second using even distribution. If these values are not configured in this way, calls will be set up at a rate of less than 60 calls per second.

Note: Various SSCOP parameter settings determine the maximum credit window. As a result, you may not be able to directly use these settings.

For more information on the SSCOP parameter, see the Application Note entitled Connecting a CBX or GX Switch to a PacketStar

PSAX Multiservice Media

Gateway via an ATM Port , Document No. 255-700-236.

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces

This section provides instructions for configuring an I/O module for the

Interim Interswitch Signaling Protocol (IISP) user and network interfaces.

IISP, (formerly known as PNNI, Phase 0), was introduced as an interim stan-

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-2

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces dard, pending completion of PNNI, Phase 1. Building on ATM UNI 3.0 and

3.1, it uses static routing tables established by the network administrator to route connections around link failures.

Each connection using the IISP interface is configurable as either the user side or the network side. See the Field Description Table following the ATM

IISP Interface Configuration window for VPI and VCI connection limits.

This section provides instructions for managing interfaces by performing the following tasks:

• Configuring and applying interface(s)

• Bringing interface(s) into service

• Taking interface(s) out of service

• Viewing interface(s)

• Deleting interface(s)

• Viewing interface statistics

Configuring and Viewing the ATM IISP Interfaces

Begin

At the conclusion of the module port and channel configuration procedure, you accessed the ATM IISP Interface Configuration window (see

Figure 4-1).

1 Select the values for the fields on the window in Figure 4-1 from the values given in Table 4-1. Table 1-1 describes the commands on the window.

2 To apply the interface values you selected, select the Apply interface

Configuration command.

3 If your configuration requires you to bring the interface into service at this time, do so by selecting the Bring Interface Into Service command. For more information on other configuration windows on which you can bring interfaces into service, see the “Bringing One or More ATM

IISP Interfaces into Service” procedure in this guide.

Note: The interface must have in-service status so that the PVC and SVC connections you will set up to use this interface will pass traffic.

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-3

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces

Commands

Figure 4-1. ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window

The commands on this window have the following functions:

Command

Apply Interface

Configuration

Function

Applies the configuration field values you set.

Reset Interface Display Resets the fields to the last set of applied values.

Bring Interface Into Service Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status, and then displays the value InService in the [Admin

Status] field. You must first configure the interface before you can use this command.

Note: This command is displayed only when the [Admin Status] field is OutOf-

Service .

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-4

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces

Command

Take Interface Out of Service

Function

Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status, and then displays the value OutOfService in the [Admin

Status] field. You must use this command first before using the Delete Interface and Return command.

Note: This command is displayed only when the [Admin Status] field is

InService .

Delete Interface and Return Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring.

Note: You must first take the interface out of service (using the Take Interface Out of Service command) before you can use this command.

Continuous Update Continuously updates the information in the Interface Statistics fields every second.

Select this command to turn the continuous updating on and off as needed.

Reset Statistics

Go Back to Port Configuration

Removes the values from the Interface

Statistics fields and resets them to zero ( 0 ).

Redisplays the port and channel configuration window of the module you are configuring.

Table 4-1. Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

[Oper Status]

(display only)

Field Values

Default:

Unconfigured

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Unconfigured

InService

OutOfService

Description

Indicates whether the interface can pass traffic or not. The administrative status field below must be

InService before the interface can pass traffic.

The interface is unconfigured.

The interface is operational.

The interface is not operational because some condition is preventing the port from being fully operational, such as a loss of signal to the port.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-5

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces

Table 4-1. Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

[Admin Status]

(display only)

Field Values

Default:

Unconfigured

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Unconfigured

InService

OutOfService

Description

Indicates the administrative status of the interface.

The interface is unconfigured.

The interface is in service.

The interface is not in service.

Over Subscription Default: 10

Range: 1–100

Format: Numeric

Allows for the allocated reserved bandwidth for the line to be over-utilized by up to a factor of

100. Generally, a value between 1 and 4 will normally not cause problems, although higher levels are often acceptable.

Note: For the maximum and minimum VPI/VCI values below, always enter or change the maximum value before the minimum value.

Min SVC VPI

Max SVC VPI

Default: 0

Range: 0–255

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: 0–255

Format: Numeric

Indicates the minimum VPI value in which signaling can occur on this interface.

Any data you enter in this field is relevant only if you set the ATM Signaling field to Enabled .

The maximum VPI in which signaling can occur on this interface.

Any data you enter in this field is relevant only if you set the ATM Signaling field to Enabled .

Min SVC VCI

Max SVC VCI

Default: 32

Range: 32–65535

Format: Numeric

Default: 255

Range: 32–65535

Format: Numeric

The minimum VCI in which signaling can occur on this interface.

Any data you enter in this field is relevant only if you set the ATM Signaling field to Enabled .

The maximum VCI in which signaling can occur on this interface.

Any data you enter in this field is relevant only if you set the ATM Signaling field to Enabled .

ATM Signaling Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Indicates whether the ATM Signaling path is enabled or disabled on the preceding Min SVC

VPI and Max SVC VPI fields. SVCs use ATM signaling to set up and tear down dynamic connections on this interface.

SVCs cannot be created on this interface. All VPIs and VCI ranges are used for PVCs, not SVCs.

SVCs can be created on this interface.

PVCs can be created only outside the maximum and minimum VPI and VCI ranges listed above in the Min SVC VPI, Max SVC VPI, Min SVC VCI, and Max SVC VCI fields.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-6

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces

Table 4-1. Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

UPC Support

UBR Load Balancing

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Description

Indicates whether usage parameter control is to be used on all VCs on this interface. UPC determines if traffic control is performing to negotiated

PCR, SCR, or MBS.

Disables UPC support.

If UPC Support is disabled, traffic policing cannot be supported on any VC on this interface.

Enables UPC support, providing traffic control support on this interface. This feature is supported on these modules only:

• 1-Port OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM

• 1-Port OC-3c 1+1 APS SM/MM

• 1-Port STM-1 1+1 MSP SM/MM

• 21-Port High Density E1 Multiservice

• 12-Port Medium Density DS1 Multiservice

The feature is supported on these channelized

DS3 modules only (when channelizing to DS0s):

• 1-Port Channelized DS3 Multiservice

• 1-Port DS3 IMA

• Quadserial

Note: Enabling both UPC support and traffic shaping at the same time on this interface is an incompatible configuration and will be rejected.

Specifies whether UBR Load Balancing is to be used on this interface. Load balancing is performed according to traffic conditions, which determines how the available bandwidth on individual channels is used for path and route selection. After a channel is saturated, the transmit load is distributed (balanced) among other available links (channels) having the same origin, destination, and parameters. Channels with the highest available bandwidth values are filled first, followed by the lower capacity channels.

Note: Virtual interfaces do not support UBR Load

Balancing.

Disables UBR Load Balancing on the connections on this interface.

Enables UBR Load Balancing on the connections on this interface. Selecting this value includes

UBR in the cps counts of the [Egress Avail BW] field.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-7

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces

Table 4-1. Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

SSCOP Rx Wnd

Size

Traffic Shaping

[Valid Cells Rcvd]

(display only)

[Errored Cells

Rcvd]

(display only)

Field Values

Default: 32

Range: 8–32

Format: Packets

Description

Indicates the service-specific connection-oriented protocol (SSCOP) layer receive window size for this interface. This window shows the total number of packets that must be acknowledged by the receiving side before more packets are sent from the transmitting side.

On the receiving side, values must be equal to or greater than the values for the transmit side for fastest transmission rates. This prescription is suggested for connecting to a Multiservice Media

Gateway from a remote site only. The Multiservice Media Gateway configures these settings internally in its own ATM switch.

For more information, see the Application Note entitled Connecting a CBX or GX Switch to a Packet-

Star® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway Via an ATM

Port , Issue 2, Document No. 255-700-236.

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0–2

Format: Exponent notation

Default: 0

Range: 0–2

Format: Numeric

Indicates whether traffic shaping is to be used on this interface. Traffic shaping is an input cell selection algorithm (leaky bucket) that smooths bursts of input traffic. This feature is available only on these modules:

• 1-Port STM-1 MM/SM with AQueMan

• 1-Port STM-1 MM/SM with Traffic Shaping

• 1-Port OC-3c MM/SM with AQueMan

• 1-Port OC-3c MM/SM with Traffic Shaping

• 1-Port OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM

Note: This feature must be enabled if using ATM traffic shaping prior to egress from an ATM trunk port on the OC-3c APS or the STM-1 MSP modules. For instructions on configuring ATM traffic shaping, see the your PSAX chassis User Guide.

Disables the traffic shaping feature. Disabled

Enabled Enables the traffic shaping feature.

Note: Enabling both the UPC Support and the

Traffic Shaping fields on this interface is an incompatible configuration and will be rejected.

Interface Statistics Panel (display only)

Displays the number of valid cells received since the statistics were last reset on this interface.

Displays the number of errored cells received since the statistics were last reset on this interface.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-8

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces

Table 4-1. Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

[Mismatched Cells

Rcvd]

(display only)

[Valid Cells Sent]

(display only)

[Null Cells Sent]

(display only)

[Time Elapsed]

(display only)

[Ingress Avail BW]

(display only)

Field Values

Default: 0

Range: 0–2

Format: numeric

Description

Displays the number of mismatched cells received since the statistics were last reset on this interface.

Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0–2

Format: Exponent notation

Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0–2

Format: Exponent notation

Displays the number of valid cells sent since the statistics were last reset on this interface.

Displays the number of null cells sent since the statistics were last reset on this interface.

Default: 0:00:00

Range: Dependent on session length

Format: Numeric

(hour:minutes: seconds)

Displays the time elasped since counter began running since the statistics were last reset on this interface.

Default: 0

Range: Module dependent

Format: Numeric

(cps)

353207).(Any OC-12 module will show the value

1412830). The ingress available bandwidth depends on the configured module parameters, such as port strapping, type of PLCP mapping, configured port speed, and other factors. As each new connection is added, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field may decrease.

Bandwidth for UBR connections is not included, unless the UBR Load Balancing field on this interface is Enabled . You will see values in this field only for connections that are in service.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-9

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces

Table 4-1. Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

[Egress Avail BW]

(display only)

[Ingress Total BW]

(display only)

[Egress Total BW]

(display only)

Field Values

Default: 0

Range: Module dependent

Format: Numeric

(cps)

Default:

Range:

User-configured

Format: Numeric

(cps)

Default: 0

Range:

User-configured

Format: Numeric

(cps)

Description

Displays the total egress bandwidth available for connections for this interface. The value 0 is changed to 353207 after the Apply command is selected. As each new connection is added, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field may decrease. Bandwidth for UBR connections is not included, unless the UBR Load

Balancing field on this interface is Enabled . You will see values in this field only for connections that are in service.

Displays the total bandwidth available for use on the current interface in the incoming direction

(in cps). Bandwidth for UBR connections is included.

Displays the total bandwidth available for use on the current interface in the outgoing direction

(in cps). Bandwidth for UBR connections included.

Bringing One or More ATM IISP Interfaces Into Service

Before you can configure a connection using an ATM IISP interface, you must first bring an ATM IISP interface into service. You can do this task from several different windows. To bring one or more interfaces into service, perform the step in the following procedure.

Steps to Bring One or More ATM IISP Interfaces into Service

Begin

Depending on which type of module you are configuring and which window you have currently displayed, select either the Bring Interface Into Service or the Bring All Interfaces Into Service command on the type of window shown in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2. Windows on Which You Can Bring an ATM IISP Interface into Service

If the module you are configuring is: an unchannelized single-port module, you can bring one or more interfaces into service on these windows:

• Port and channel configuration window

• ATM IISP Interface Configuration window

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-10

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces

Table 4-2. Windows on Which You Can Bring an ATM IISP Interface into Service

If the module you are configuring is: an unchannelized multiport module, a channelized single-port module, a channelized multiport module, you can bring one or more interfaces into service on these windows:

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

• ATM IISP Interface Configuration window

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• ATM IISP Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all channel interfaces on a port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• ATM IISP Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

After you select the command, the value InService is displayed in the

[Admin Status] and the [Oper Status] fields. You can now provision connections that use this interface. (See the PacketStar PSAX System Connections Provisioning Guide for more information). If connections have already been configured for this interface, the system can now resume passing traffic through this interface.

End

Viewing IISP Interface Configuration Parameters

Begin

The IISP interface is accessed for viewing by the same path as configuring the interface. This path may vary depending on the module you used

(see the Reference Information appendix in this guide for a list of what modules can be used for the interfaces available). You should always view an interface and determine whether you have chosen the correct one before you perform any of the procedures in step 2 below.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-11

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces

1 Return to the Console Interface Main Menu for the module you configured the IISP interface on and repeat the steps in the “Configuring an

IISP Interface” procedure in this guide until you access the ATM IISP

Interface Configuration window.

2 Proceed to one of the following sections, as needed:

• Bringing One or More ATM UNI Interfaces into Service

• Taking One or More ATM UNI Interfaces out of Service

• Deleting One or More ATM UNI Interfaces

End

Viewing IISP Interface Statistics

To view the ATM IISP interface statistics, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

The IISP Interface Statistics are viewed on the ATM IISP Interface Configuration window. The commands and fields for the statistics panel are on the

Field Description table for the same window.

Traffic must have passed on the connection before statistics will display. To see IISP statistics, see the ATM IISP Interface Configuration procedure in this guide and repeat the navigational steps only, not the configuration steps.

End

Taking One or More IISP Interfaces Out of Service

Use this procedure to take an interface out of service only after it is in service.

If the interface you want to delete is not already in service, you will not see the Take Interface Out of Service Command on the interface configuration window.

On a module configuration, module channel configuration, or module interface configuration window:

• the [Oper Status] field indicates InService or OutOfService

• the [Admin Status] field indicates InService or OutOfService

On a module port and channel configuration window:

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-12

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces the interface is in service. Look in the command field at the bottom of each of these window for the command to take the interface(s) out of service, and select it if necessary.

You need to take an ATM IISP interface out of service first before you can perform the following tasks:

• Deleting an interface

• Performing diagnostic or maintenance procedures on an interface

You can do this task from several different windows (see Table 4-3). To take one or more interfaces out of service, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

1 Depending on the module you are using, select either the Take Interface Out Of Service or the Take All Interfaces Out Of Service command on the type of window shown in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3. Windows on Which You Can Take an IISP Interface out of Service

If the module you are working with is: an unchannelized single-port module, an unchannelized multiport module, a channelized single-port module, a channelized multiport module, you can take one or more interfaces out of service on these windows:

• Port and channel configuration window

• IISP Interface Configuration window

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

• IISP Interface Configuration window

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• IISP Interface Configuration window

(just the interface for the channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all channel interfaces on a port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• IISP Interface Configuration window

(just the interface for the channel)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-13

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces

The window status line prompts:

Taking the interface down will cause all SVCs to be lost.

Continue? (y/n)

2 Select Y.

The interface is taken out of service. The value OutOfService is now displayed in the [Admin Status] and the [Oper Status] fields. If a connection is already configured for this interface, the traffic flow is stopped. To resume traffic on the connection using this interface, you must bring the interface back into service (see the section, “Bringing One or More ATM

IISP Interfaces into Service).

End

Deleting One or More ATM IISP Interfaces

Begin

You can do this task from several different windows. To delete one or more

ATM UNI interfaces, perform the steps in the following procedure.

1 Make sure the interface is out of service before deleting it. See the “Taking One or More IISP Interfaces Out of Service” procedure if you need to the take the interface out of service.

2 Depending on which module you are working with and which window you have currently displayed, select one of the following deletion commands on the type of window shown in Table 4-4:

• Delete All Interfaces

• Delete All Interfaces On This Port

• Delete Interface and Return

Table 4-4. Windows on Which You Can Delete One or More ATM IISP Interfaces

If the module you are working with is: an unchannelized single-port module, you can delete one or more interfaces on these windows:

• Port and channel configuration window

Note: On this window for this type of module, you delete a single interface by selecting Unconfigured in the Interface

Type field.

• ATM IISP Interface Configuration window (deletes the interface for a single channel)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-14

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces

Table 4-4. Windows on Which You Can Delete One or More ATM IISP Interfaces

If the module you are working with is: an unchannelized multiport module, a channelized single-port module, a channelized multiport module, you can delete one or more interfaces on these windows:

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

Note: On this window for this type of module, you delete a single interface by selecting Unconfigured in the Interface

Type field.

• ATM IISP Interface Configuration window (deletes the interface for a single channel)

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual DS1 ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window

Note: On this window for this type of module, you delete a single interface by selecting Unconfigured in the Interface

Type field.

• ATM IISP Interface Configuration window (deletes the interface for a single channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all interfaces on one port)

• Channel configuration window

Note: On this window for this type of module, you delete a single interface by selecting Unconfigured in the Interface

Type field.

ATM IISP Interface Configuration window

(deletes the interface for a single channel)

3 On the ATM IISP Interface Configuration window, select the Delete

Interface and Return command.

The window status line prompts with the following message (or something similar):

Are you sure that you want to delete this interface?

4 Select Y.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-15

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM IISP User and Network Interfaces

End

The window returns to channel configuration window of the module from which the interface was just deleted.

You may also delete an interface from the port and channel configuration window of the module configured for the IISP interface. If the interface is in service you must select the Take All interfaces Out of Service command, then select the Delete All Interfaces On This Port command.

Modifying IISP Interface Values

After you have configured an ATM IISP interface for a specified port and channel, you cannot directly change the parameters for this interface even if it is out of service. The concept for “modifying” (replacing) an ATM IISP interface is that you delete the interface with the parameters you no longer want for a specified port and channel, and then configure a new interface for the same port and channel. Perform the following procedures in the sequence shown to replace an ATM IISP interface that has parameters you do not want.

1 On the Equipment Configuration window, select the module for which you want to replace an interface.

2 Select the port and channel for the interface you want to replace.

3 View the parameters of the interface you do not want to be sure you are choosing the right one. See the procedure in the section, “Viewing the

Parameters for an ATM IISP Interface.”

4 Take the interface out of service. See the procedure in the section, “Taking One or More ATM IISP Interfaces out of Service.”

Note: After you perform this procedure, the traffic flow on the connection using the interface is stopped.

5 Delete the interface. See the procedure in the section, “Deleting One or

More ATM IISP Interfaces.”

Note: After you perform this procedure, the connection using the interface is automatically deleted from the Connections database.

6 Configure a new interface. See the procedure in the section, “Configuring an ATM IISP Interface.”

7 Bring the newly configured interface into service. See the procedure in the section, “Bringing One or More ATM IISP interfaces into Service.”

Note: You now need to provision a new connection using the newly configured interface for the same specified port and channel for which you deleted the original interface (and connection). (See the PacketStar PSAX System Connections Provisioning Guide for more information.)

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-16

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

This section provides procedures on performing the following PNNI interface tasks:

• Configuring and applying interface(s)

• Bringing interface(s) into service

• Taking interface(s) out of service

• Viewing interface(s)

• Deleting interface(s)

• Viewing interface statistics

Note: This instruction is for a PNNI interface without a multi-level hierarchy. For hierarchical PNNI interface of two or more levels, see the appropriate chassis user guide.

Configuring a PNNI Interface

To set the values for the ATM PNNI interface, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Note: You must configure a PNNI node and bring it into service before configuring the PNNI interface. For instructions, see the System

Configuration section in the appropriate chassis user guide.

Note: This procedure provides instructions in configuring a one-level, peer-to-peer PNNI interface only . If you want to configure a multilevel hierarchy, see the System Configuration section in the appropriate chassis user guide.

Begin

The ATM PNNI Interface Configuration window is displayed in

Figure 4-2. Table 1-1 describes the commands on the window. Table 4-5 describes the fields on the window.

8 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in

Table 4-5.

9 To apply the interface configuration values, select the Apply Interface

Configuration command (or press Ctrl+A).

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-17

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

10 If your configuration requires you to bring the interface into service at this time, do so by selecting the Bring Interface Into Service command. For more information on other configuration windows on which you can bring interfaces into service, see the “Bringing One or More

Interfaces into Service” procedure in this guide.

End

Commands

Figure 4-2. ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

The commands in this window have the following functions:

Command

Apply Interface Configuration

Bring Interface Into Service

(displays when the [Admin

Status] field is OutOfService )

Function

Applies the configuration field value you set.

Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value InService is displayed in the [Admin Status] field.

You must first configure the interface before you can use this command.

Take Interface Out of Service

(displays when the [Admin

Status] field is InService )

Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. The value OutOfService is displayed in the [Admin Status] field.

You must use this command first before using the Delete Interface and Return command.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-18

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Command Function

Update InterfaceDisplay Refreshes the values on this window.

Delete Interface and

Return

Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring.

You must first take interface out of service

(using the Take Interface Out of Service command) before you can use this command.

View Interface Statistics Displays the ATM PNNI Interface Statistics window.

ILMI Configuration

ILMI Statistics

Displays the PNNI ILMI Configuration window.

Displays the PNNI ILMI Statistics window.

Go Back to Previous

Screen

Redisplays the configuration window for the module you are configuring.

Table 4-5. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name Field Values Description

Node Index Default: 0

Range: 0–65535

Format: Numeric

Specifies an index that identifies a logical PNNI entity within the managed system. The value 0 indicates a logical entity within the switching system that manages routes only over non-PNNI interfaces. By default, only the node identified by the node index is created, and all PNNI interfaces are associated with that node; only one PNNI node can be provisioned per switch.

Note: For the maximum and minimum VPI/VCI values below, always enter or change the maximum value before the minimum value.

Min/Max VPI

Min/Max VCI

Default: 0/0

Max Limit: 255 (for low-speed modules);

4095 (for high-speed modules)

Range: As noted above. VPI 0 is not available. See Note at right.

Format: Numeric

Specifies the lower/upper boundary of the virtual path indicator (VPI) for SVC connections.

Note: As the PNNI signaling field is enabled by default on this interface, VPI 0 is not available.

Default: 32/65535

Range: Min Value: 32

Max Value: 65535

Format: Numeric

Specifies the lower/upper boundary of the VCI for SVC connections.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-19

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Table 4-5. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name Field Values

Over Subscription Default: 10

Range: 1–100

Format: Numeric

UPC Support Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Character

Disabled

Enabled

Description

Allows for the allocated reserved bandwidth for the line to be over-utilized by up to a factor of

100. Generally, a value between 1 and 4 is normally safe, although higher levels are often acceptable.

Indicates usage parameter control (policing), which determines if traffic control is performing to negotiated PCR, SCR, or MBS. This feature is supported on these modules:

• OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM 1+1 APS/MSP

• OC-3c 1+1 APS SM/MM

• STM-1 1+1 MSP SM/MM

• 21-Port High-Density E1 Multiservice

• 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice

The feature is supported on these channelized

DS3 modules (when channelizing to DS0s):

• 1-Port Channelized DS3 Multiservice

• 1-Port Channelized DS3 CES

• 1-Port DS3 IMA

Disables UPC support.

If UPC support is disabled, traffic policing cannot be supported on any VC.

Enables UPC support, providing traffic policing support for all VCs.

Note: Do not enable the Traffic Shaping feature and the UPC Support feature for the same connection. Your configuration will be rejected.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-20

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Table 4-5. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

Traffic Shaping

UBR Load Balancing

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Description

Indicates whether traffic shaping is used on this interface. Traffic shaping is an input cell selection algorithm (leaky bucket) that smooths bursts of input traffic. This feature is available only on these modules:

• OC-12c/STM-4c 1+1 APS/MSP

• OC-3c Multimode and Single-Mode

• STM-1 Multimode and Single-Mode

Note: This feature must be enabled if using rate shaping on the OC-3c APS or the STM-1 MSP modules prior to egress from an ATM trunk port.

Rate shaping is not available on the

OC-12c/STM-4c modules.

Disables the feature on this interface.

Enables the feature on this interface.

Note: Do not enable the Traffic Shaping feature and the UPC Support feature for the same connection. Your configuration will be rejected.

Note: Virtual interfaces do not support UBR Load

Balancing.

Disables UBR load balancing on the channels supported by this interface.

Enables UBR load balancing on this interface.

Selecting this value includes UBR in the cps counts of the [Egress Avail BW] field.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-21

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Table 4-5. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

SSCOP Rx Wnd

Size

Field Values

Default: 32

Range: 8–32

Format: Packets

Description

Indicates the service-specific connection-oriented protocol (SSCOP) layer receive window size. This window shows the total number of packets that must be acknowledged by the receiving side before more packets are sent from the transmitting side.

On the receiving side, values must be equal to or greater than the values for the transmit side for fastest transmission rates.

Note: These settings are suggested for connecting to a Multiservice Media Gateway from a remote site only. The Multiservice Media Gateway configures these settings internally in its own ATM switch.

For more information on this field, see the Application Note titled Connecting a CBX or GX Switch to a PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway Via an ATM Port , Issue 2, Document No. 255-700-236.

Enables ATM signaling over a PNNI link that sets up and tears down SVCs.

[PNNI

Signaling]

(display only)

[VPI/VCI Signaling

Channel]

(display only)

[Remote Min/Max

SVC VPI]

(display only)

Default: Enabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Enabled

Disabled

Default: 0/5

Range: 0–4095

Format: Numeric

Default: 0/0

Range: 0–4095

Format: Numeric

Enables ATM signaling over a PNNI link.

Disables ATM signaling over a PNNI link.

Displays the virtual path/virtual channel identifier for SVC signaling that carries the call setup and teardown data.

Indicates the minimum (lower) and maximum

(upper) boundary of the VPI for SVC connections for the remote side.

[Remote Min/Max

SVC VCI]

(display only)

[Port Id]

(display only)

Default: 32/65535

Range: 32–65535

Format: Numeric

Default: 201001

Range: Chassis dependent

Format: Numeric

Displays the minimum (lower) and maximum

(upper) boundary of the VCI for SVC connections for the remote side.

Displays the interface port identifier, a point of attachment of a logical link to a given logical node. This is automatically generated based on the location (slot, port, channel) of the interface.

A value of 0 indicates that no port has been specified.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-22

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Table 4-5. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

[Aggregate Token]

(display only)

[Traffic Descriptor]

(display only)

VP Capability

Field Values

Default: 0

Range:

0–2147483647

Format: cps

Default:

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Default:

True

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Description

Indicates the interface aggregate token, whose links to a given neighbor node are to be aggregated and advertised as a single node link. For example, if there are 3 physical links between two chassis, the user can set the aggregation token to the same value on each interface (both sides). This makes the aggregated links appear to the rest of the network as one logical link.

This field is not currently supported.

Displays the traffic descriptor index,an entry in the atmTrafficDescrParamTable defined in RFC

1695 that specifies the traffic allocation for the

PNNI routing control channel (VCI=18) on this interface.

Indicates whether the interface is capable of having virtual path connections (VPCs) established within it.

[Service Category]

(display only)

[Admin Status]

(display only)

False

Default:

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

NrtVbr

Cbr

RtVbr

Abr

Ubr

NrtVbr

Default:

OutOfService

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

OutOfService

The interface is capable of having VPCs established within it.

The interface cannot have VPCs established within it.

Indicates a quality of service class type. The speed and quality of transmission depends on the classchoice made. The higher the class, the higher the guarantee that the packets will get to their destination on time. Cbr is the highest class, and Ubr is the lowest.

Non-realtime variable bit rate service.

Constant bit rate service.

Real-time variable bit rate service.

Available bit rate service.

Unspecified bit rate service.

Indicates whether the interface is configurable to carry connections or not.

InService

Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from being configured with an interface.

Indicates that no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-23

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Table 4-5. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

[Oper Status]

(display only)

Field Values

Default:

OutOfService

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

OutOfService

Description

Indicates whether the configured interface is capable of carrying traffic.

[Ingress Avail BW]

(display only)

InService

Default: 0

Range:

User-configured

Format: cps

Indicates that the configured interface is not operational.

Indicates that the configured interface is operational.

Displays the total ingress bandwidth available for connections for this interface. The value 0 is changed to the cps count available for the interface after the Apply command is selected. The ingress available bandwidth depends on the configured module parameters, such as port strapping, type of cell mapping, configured port speed, and other factors. As each new connection is added, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field may decrease. Bandwidth for UBR connections is not included, unless the

UBR Load Balancing field on this interface is

Enabled . You will see values in the [Ingress Avail

BW] field only for connections that are in service.

• Any non-CES OC3 and STM-1 APS module will show the value 353207

• Any OC-12 module will show the value

1412830

The values for other types of I/O modules that use this field vary depending on the following parameters :

• IMA - number of ports configured

• DS1/E1/STS-1e - number of channels strapped

• DS3/E3 - Cell Mapping ( Plcp or DirectMapping )

• Serial - port bandwidth configured

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-24

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Table 4-5. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

[Egress Avail BW]

(display only)

Field Values

Default: 0

Range:

User-configured

Format: cps

Description

Displays the total egress bandwidth available for connections for this interface. The value 0 is changed to the cps count available for the interface after the Apply command is selected. The egress available bandwidth depends on the configured module parameters, such as port strapping, type of cell mapping, configured port speed, and other factors. As each new connection is added, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field may decrease. Bandwidth for UBR connections is not included, unless the

UBR Load Balancing field on this interface is

Enabled . You will see values in the [Egress Avail

BW] field only for connections that are in service.

• Any non-CES OC3 and STM-1 APS module will show the value 353207

• Any OC-12 module will show the value

1412830

The values for other types of I/O modules that use this field vary depending on the following parameters :

• IMA -IMA - number of ports configured

• DS1/E1/STS-1e - number of channels strapped

• DS3/E3 - Cell Mapping ( Plcp or DirectMapping )

• Serial - port bandwidth configured

Specifies the total bandwidth available for use on the current interface in the incoming direction

(in cps). Bandwidth for UBR connections is included.

[Ingress Total BW]

(display only)

[Egress Total BW]

(display only)

Default: 0

Range:

User-configured

Format: cps

Default: 0

Range:

User-configured

Format: cps

AdminWeight-cbr Default: 5040

Range:

504–16777215

Format: cps

Specifies the total bandwidth available for use on the current interface in the outgoing direction

(in cps). Bandwidth for UBR connections included.

Specifies the administrative weight for the Cbr service category. This value is used by PNNI in path selection. The higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the Note below this table.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-25

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Table 4-5. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

AdminWeightrtVbr

Field Values

Default: 5040

Range:

504–16777215

Format: cps

AdminWeightnrtVbr

Default: 5040

Range:

504–16777215

Format: cps

AdminWeight-ubr Default: 5040

Range:

504–16777215

Format: cps

Description

Specifies the administrative weight for the RtVbr service category. Used by PNNI in path selection.

The higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the Note below this table.

Specifies the administrative weight for the

NrtVbr service category. Used by PNNI in path selection. The higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the Note below this table.

Specifies the administrative weight for the Ubr service category. Used by PNNI in path selection.

The higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the Note below this table.

Note: When configuring the Admin Weight fields, you can choose a value based on the range listed in the table aboveTable 4-5. However, it is recommended that if you want to use a value greater than 5040 (the default value), you should choose a number divisible by 5040, such as 10080 , 15120 , and so on. If you want to use a value smaller than 5040 , choose a multiple of 5040, such as 2, 3, 5,

6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and so on, or their multiples. The PSAX <XXXX> system allows up to 20 administrative weight entries per PNNI route.

Bringing One or More PNNI Interfaces Into Service

Before you can configure a connection using an PNNI interface, you must first bring an PNNI interface into service. You can do this task from several different windows. To bring one or more interfaces into service, perform the step in the following procedure.

Begin

Table 4-6. Windows on Which You Can Bring an PNNI Interface into Service

If the module you are configuring is: you can bring one or more interfaces into service on these windows: an unchannelized single-port module,

• Port and channel configuration window

• PNNI Interface Configuration window

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-26

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Table 4-6. Windows on Which You Can Bring an PNNI Interface into Service

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

• PNNI Interface Configuration window

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• PNNI Interface Configuration window

(just the interface for the channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all channel interfaces on a port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• PNNI Interface Configuration window

(just the interface for the channel)

After you select the command, the value InService is displayed in the

End

Viewing the Parameters of a PNNI Interface

To view a previously configured PNNI interface, perform the steps in the following procedure. You should always view an interface and determine whether you have chosen the correct one before you perform any of the procedures in step 3 below.

Begin

1 On the Equipment Configuration window, select the module for which you want to view the interface parameters.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-27

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

The module configuration window or the port and channel configuration window for the module is displayed.

2 On the module’s port and channel configuration window or the channel configuration window, select the channel and then select the Configure

Interface command.

The PNNI Interface Configuration window displaying the parameters for the port and channel you selected is displayed.

3 Proceed to one of the following sections, as needed:

• Bringing One or More PNNI Interfaces into Service

• Taking One or More PNNI Interfaces out of Service

• Deleting One or More PNNI Interfaces

End

Viewing PNNI Interface Statistics

Begin

To view interface statistics for this connection, select the View Interface

Statistics –> command on the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration window and press Enter (or press Ctrl+F).

The ATM PNNI Interface Statistics window is displayed (Figure 4-3).

Table 1-1 describes the commands on the window. Table 4-7 describes the fields on the window.

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-28

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Commands

Figure 4-3. ATM PNNI Interface Statistics Window

The commands on this window have the following functions:

Command

Continuous Update

Function

Continuously updates all fields once every second.

Resets statistics counters for this interface.

Reset Statistics

Go Back to previous screen Returns to the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration window.

4 Select the values for the fields on this window from Table 4-7.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-29

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Table 4-7. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Statistics Window

Field Name

[Errored Cells

Rcvd]

Field Values

[Valid Cells Rcvd] Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2

-1)

Format: exponential notation

Default: 0000000000

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

[Mismatched Cells

Rcvd]

Default: 0000000000

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default:

Description

Specifies the number of valid cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Specifies the number of errored cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Specifies the number of mismatched cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

[Valid Cells Sent] Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2

-1)

Format: exponential notation

[Null Cells Sent]

[Time Elapsed]

Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2 notation

-1)

Format: exponential

Specifies the number of valid cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Specifies the number of null cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Note: This parameter is not supported in the

OC-12c/STM-4c SM/MM 1+1 APS/MSP modules.

Default: 0:00:00

Range: NA

Format: Time in hour

(x), minutes (xx), seconds (xx)

Specifies the time elapsed since the last reset in h:mm:ss (hour: minute:seconds) format.

Taking One or More PNNI Interfaces Out of Service

You need to take an an PNNI interface out of service first before you can perform the following tasks:

• Deleting an interface

• Performing diagnostic or maintenance procedures on an interface

You can do this task from several different windows. To take one or more interfaces out of service, perform the steps in the following procedure.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-30

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Begin

1 Depending on which type of module you are working with and which window you have currently displayed, select either the Take Interface

Out Of Service or the Take All Interfaces Out Of Service command on the type of window shown in Table 4-8.

Table 4-8. Windows on Which You Can Take an PNNI Interface out of Service

• Port and channel configuration window

• PNNI Interface Configuration window

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

• PNNI Interface Configuration window

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• PNNI Interface Configuration window

(just the interface for the channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all channel interfaces on a port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• PNNI Interface Configuration window

(just the interface for the channel)

The following prompt is displayed:

Take the interface down Although Not Operational. Continue?

(y/n)

2 Type Y to continue.

The value OutOfService is now displayed in the [Admin Status] and the

[Oper Status] fields. If a connection is already configured for this interface, the traffic flow is stopped. To resume traffic on the connection using this interface, you must bring the interface back into service (see the section, “Bringing One or More PNNI Interfaces into Service).

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-31

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Deleting One or More PNNI Interfaces

You need to delete an PNNI interface before you can replace an interface for a specified port and channel.

Note: Before you can delete an PNNI interface, you must first take the interface out of service. See the section, “Taking One or More PNNI

Interfaces out of Service.”

You can do this task from several different windows. To delete one or more

PNNI interfaces, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

1 Depending on which module you are working with and which window you have currently displayed, select one of the following deletion commands on the type of window shown in Table 4-9:

• Delete All Interfaces

• Delete All Interfaces On This Port

• Delete Interface and Return

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-32

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Table 4-9. Windows on Which You Can Delete One or More PNNI Interfaces

• Port and channel configuration window

Note: On this window for this type of module, you delete a single interface by selecting Unconfigured in the Interface

Type field.

• PNNI Interface Configuration window

(deletes the interface for a single channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

Note: On this window for this type of module, you delete a single interface by selecting Unconfigured in the Interface

Type field.

• PNNI Interface Configuration window

(deletes the interface for a single channel)

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual DS1 ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window

Note: On this window for this type of module, you delete a single interface by selecting Unconfigured in the Interface

Type field.

• PNNI Interface Configuration window

(deletes the interface for a single channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all interfaces on one port)

• Channel configuration window

Note: On this window for this type of module, you delete a single interface by selecting Unconfigured in the Interface

Type field.

• PNNI Interface Configuration window

(deletes the interface for a single channel)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-33

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Depending on which module you are working with and which window you you have currently displayed, a prompt similar to one of the following is displayed:

Delete interface: all connections for channel will be lost.

Continue? (y/n)

Are you SURE that you want to delete ALL interfaces for this card? (y/n)

2 Type y to continue.

The interface is deleted, and any connections provisioned using the interface you just deleted are also automatically deleted.

End

Modifying a PNNI Interface

If you need to change the interface configuration values for AdminWeightcbr, AdminWeight-rtVbr, AdminWeight-nrtVbr, or AdminWeight-ubr at any time after the interface has been brought into service, you must first take the interface out of service, reconfigure the desired values, apply those values, and bring the interface back into service. Perform the following procedure,

“Steps to Modify an PNNI Interface” to replace an PNNI interface that has parameters you do not want.

Modifying the Non-administrative Weight Values for the ATM PNNI Interface

If you need to change the interface configuration values other than Admin-

Weight-cbr, AdminWeight-rtVbr, AdminWeight-nrtVbr, or AdminWeight-ubr at any time after the interface has been brought into service, you must first take the interface out of service, delete the interface, and then re-create the interface by configuring the desired values.

Begin

1 On the Equipment Configuration window, select the module for which you want to replace an interface.

2 Select the port and channel for the interface you want to replace.

3 View the parameters of the interface you do not want to be sure you are choosing the right one. See the procedure in the section, “Viewing the

Parameters for an PNNI Interface.”

4 Take the interface out of service. See the procedure in the section, “Taking One or More PNNI Interfaces out of Service.”

Note: After you perform this procedure, the traffic flow on the connection using the interface is stopped.

5 Configure a new interface. See the procedure in the section, “Configuring an PNNI Interface.”

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-34

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

6 Bring the newly configured interface into service. See the procedure in the section, “Bringing One or More PNNI interfaces into Service.”

End

Configuring PNNI ILMI

Perform these steps to configure your connection for PNNI integrated link management interface (ILMI):

Begin

1 From the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration window, select the ILMI

Configuration command, or press C tr l+ O .

The PNNI ILMI Configuration window is displayed (see Figure 4-4).

Commands

Figure 4-4. PNNI ILMI Configuration Window

The commands on this window have the following functions:

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-35

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Command

Apply ILMI Configuration

Go Back to Interface

Screen

Function

Applies the user input values entered on the window.

Returns to the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration window.

2 Select the values for the fields on this window from Table 4-10.

Table 4-10. Field Descriptions for the PNNI ILMI Configuration Window

Field Name

[ILMI Oper Status]

(display only)

Field Values

Default:

OutOfService

Range: N/A

Format: predefined

OutOfService

Description

Indicates whether ILMI connectivity is operational or not.

ILMI Protocol

[Address Registration]

(display only)

InService

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Default: Disabled

Range: As noted below.

Format: predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Indicates that ILMI connectivity is not operational.

Indicates that ILMI connectivity is operational.

Specifies the Integrated Links Management Interface. A bidirectional transmission protocol that enables exchange of ATM interface parameters between two connected ATM Interface Management Entities (IMEs). These entities are an end user and a public or private network, or a public network and a private network.

Disables ILMI protocol. If you select Disabled , the other fields in this window will not show.

Enables ILMI protocol.

Specifies whether address registration is disabled or enabled.

Disables the Address Registration field. Address

Registration can be enabled only if the ILMI Protocol field is enabled.

Enables address registration.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-36

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Table 4-10. Field Descriptions for the PNNI ILMI Configuration Window

Field Name Field Values

Connectivity Procedure

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Description

Indicates the establishment and subsequent loss of ILMI connectivity detection.

[Attachment Point

Detection]

(display only)

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Disables the ILMI Connectivity Procedure.

Enables the ILMI Connectivity Procedure: the

Attachment Point Detection and Secure Link field functions are available for enablement. You must select Enabled if you want to also enable the

Attachment Point Detection and Secure Link fields.

Specifies that a change of attachment point caused by possible swapping of 2 links that were not detected by signalling will be detected.

[Secure Link]

(display only)

Default:

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: predefined

Disables Attachment Point Detection.

Enables Attachment Point Detection. A query will be sent every 5 seconds to detect a change in the address. A response indicates that the user id and address information are the same. However, if there is a change in the address, all calls will be cleared. Attachment Point Change Detection can be enabled only if Connectivity Procedure and

ILMI Protocol fields are enabled.

Detects non-ILMI connections that were not dropped when an attachment point changed.

ILMI Secure Link Procedure is disabled. It can be enabled only if the Connectivity Procedure and

Attachment Point Detection fields are enabled.

Disables the ILMI Secure Link Procedure.

Enables the ILMI Secure Link Procedure. If a response is not received, all calls are cleared, and disconnected.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-37

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Table 4-10. Field Descriptions for the PNNI ILMI Configuration Window

Field Name

Auto Configuration Procedure

[TimerT]

(display only)

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Description

Specifies the ability to automatically configure the actual VPI/VCI range based on the local

VPI/VCI and the remote VPI/VCI ranges (VPI and

VCI range negotiation).

For more information on automatic configuration procedures, see ATM Forum ILMI (Integrated Local

Management Interface), 4.0, af-ilmi-0065.000, Section

8.3.4

Disables the Automatic Configuration Procedure: the actual VPI and VCI are not automatically configured, and the connections are set up by using local VPI/VCI ranges which are defined by user.

Enables the Automatic Configuration Procedure: actual VPI/VCI are automatically configured, and the connections are set up by using the overlap

VPI/VCI ranges of the local VPI/VCI and the remote VPI/VCI ranges.

Auto configuration can be enabled only if the

ILMI Protocol field is Enabled.

Used to poll when link is operational.

The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear within the range specfied (see the Values column).

[TimerS]

(display only)

[RetryK]

(display only)

[ILMI VPI]

(display only)

Default: 5

Range: 0–(2

-1)

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Default: 1

Range: 0–(2

-1)

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Default: 4

Range: 0–(2

-1)

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Used to poll when link is not operational.

The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear within the range specfied (see the Values column).

Indicates the number of timeouts before the link becomes non-operational.

The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear within the range specfied (see the Values column).

Indicates the VPI for ILMI protocol channel in which VPI will run.

[ILMI VCI]

(display only)

Default: 0

Range: This value does not change.

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Default: 16

Range: This value does not change.

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Indicates the VCI for ILMI protocol channel in which VCI will run.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-38

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM PNNI Interfaces

Viewing PNNI ILMI Interface Statistics

Perform the steps in the following procedure to view PNNI ILMI statistics.

Begin

1 To view interface statistics for this connection, select the ILMI Statistics command on the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration window and press

Enter (or press Ctrl+I).

The PNNI ILMI Interface Statistics window is displayed (see Figure 4-5).

Table 1-8 describes the commands on the window. Table 4-11 describes the fields on the window.

Commands

Figure 4-5.

PNNI ILMI Interface Statistics Window

The commands on this window have the following functions:

Command

Continuous Update

Reset Statistics

Go Back to previous screen

Function

Continuously updates all fields once every second.

Resets statistics counters for this interface.

Returns to the ATM PNNI InterfaceConfiguration window.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-39

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

2 The values for this window are described on Table 4-11.

Table 4-11. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI ILMI Interface Statistics Window

Field Name

[Errored Cells

Rcvd]

Field Values

[Valid Cells Rcvd] Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2

-1)

Format: exponential notation

Default: 0000000000

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

[Mismatched Cells

Rcvd]

Default: 0000000000

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default:

Description

Specifies the number of valid cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Specifies the number of errored cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Specifies the number of mismatched cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

[Valid Cells Sent] Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2

-1)

Format: exponential notation

[Null Cells Sent]

[Time Elapsed]

Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2 notation

-1)

Format: exponential

Specifies the number of valid cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Specifies the number of null cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Note: This parameter is not supported in the

OC-12c/STM-4c SM/MM 1+1 APS/MSP modules.

Default: 0:00:00

Range: NA

Format: Time in hour

(x), minutes (xx), seconds (xx)

Specifies the time elapsed since the last reset in h:mm:ss (hour: minute:seconds) format.

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

This section provides instructions for configuring the ATM user-to-network interface (UNI) 3.0, 3.1, and 4.0 and the integrated link management interface (ILMI).

Configuring the ATM UNI Interface

Perform the steps in the following procedure to configure an ATM UNI interface.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-40

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

Begin

When you configure the value AtmUni3-0 , AtmUni3-1 , or AtmUni4-0 as the interface type on a module port and channel configuration window for a module that supports this type of interface, the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window is displayed (see Figure 4-6 for ATM UNI 3.0/3.1 and

Figure 4-7 for ATM UNI 4.0). Table 1-1 describes the commands on these windows. Table 4-12 describes the fields on these windows.

Figure 4-6. ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window (ATM UNI 3.0 or 3.1

Selected on the Module)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-41

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

Commands

Figure 4-7. ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window (ATM UNI 4.0 Selected on the Module)

Note: The ATM UNI Interface Configuration window for UNI 4.0 has the addition of the VUNI Support field.

1 Enter values in the fields on this window according to the information provided in Table 4-12.

2 To apply the interface configuration values, select the Apply Interface

Configuration command.

3 Go the procedure, “Bringing One or More ATM UNI Interfaces into Service.”

End

The commands on this window have the following functions:

Command

Apply Interface Configuration

Function

Applies the configuration field value you set.

Reset Interface Display Resets the fields to the last set of applied values.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-42

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

Command Function

Bring Interface Into Service Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value InService is displayed in the [Admin Status] field. You must first configure the interface before you can use this command.

Note: This command is displayed only when the [Admin Status] field is OutOf-

Service .

Take Interface Out of Service

Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. The value OutOf-

Service is displayed in the [Admin Status] field. You must use this command first before using the Delete Interface and

Return command.

Note: This command is displayed only when the [Admin Status] field is InService .

Delete Interface and Return Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring. You must first take the interface out of service (by selecting the Take

Interface Out of Service command) before you can use this command.

ATM UNI Interface Statistics

ILMI Configuration

ILMI Registered User

Address

ILMI Statistics

Go Back to Port Configuration

Displays the ATM UNI Interface Statistics window.

Displays the ATM UNI ILMI Configuration window.

Displays the ILMI Registered User Address

Table.

Displays the ILMI Statistics window

Redisplays the port and channel configuration window of the module you are configuring.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-43

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 4-12. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name Field Values Description

Over Subscription Default: 10

Range: 1–100

Format: Numeric

Specifies the risk factor for this function, which indicates the level of oversubscription allowed by the system.

Note: When entering the maximum and minimum VPI and VCI values in the following two fields, always enter or change the maximum value before entering the minimum value.

Min/Max SVC VPI Default: 0

Range: 0–255

Format: Numeric

Min/Max SVC VCI

ATM Signaling

Default:

Min: 32

Max: 255

Range: 0–65535

Format: Numeric

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Disabled

Specifies the minimum and maximum VPI values that you can assign to an SVC on this interface.

Note: Disable the ATM signaling field if you want to use the value 0 for the VPI.

Enter the maximum value after the slash and then enter the minimum value before the slash.

Specifies the minimum and maximum VCI values that you can assign to an SVC on this interface.

Enter the maximum value after the slash and then enter the minimum value before the slash.

Specifies whether SVCs can be created on this interface.

Note: use.

The value 0 for the VPI is not available for

Interface Type

Enabled

Default: Network

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Network

Indicates that SVCs cannot be created on this interface.

Indicates that SVCs can be created on this interface.

If you want to use the ILMI protocol, you must select this value. The ILMI protocol is not required if

ATM signaling is disabled.

Note: The value 0 for VPI is available for use.

Specifies whether the network or user format for cell headers will be used.

Note: When you select this value, the Prefix field is displayed below the Interface Name field.

User

Indicates that the NNI format for the cell headers will be used.

Wireless Applications: Select this value if you are configuring a link on the MSC side of a cell site-to-MSC link.

Indicates that the UNI format for the cell headers will be used.

Note: When you select this value, the User Add field is displayed below the Interface Name field.

Wireless Applications: Select this value if you are configuring a link on the cell-site side of a cell site-to-MSC link.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-44

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 4-12. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

Interface Name

Prefix

User Add

Neighbor System IP

Neighbor Name

Field Values Description

Default: N/A

Range: 0–20 characters maximum

Format: Alphanumeric

Specifies a textual name of this interface. This interface must be uniquely named on this system to distinguish parallel links with a neighboring system. If you do not give this interface a textual name, the value of this object is a zero-length string.

Default: 202020202

0202020202020202

Range: N/A

Format: Hexadecimal (13-byte:

18-hexadecimal digit beginning with

39 , 45 or 47 )

Specifies the network prefix address displays when the value Network is selected in the Interface Type field. This address is used only for address registration procedure of ILMI. This field represents the first

13 bytes of the 20-byte NSAP address. The last

7 bytes are the user part of this address (User Add field).

Default: 202020202

0202020202020202

Range: N/A

Format: Hexadecimal (13-byte:

18-hexadecimal digit beginning with

39 , 45 or 47 )

Format:

Specifies the user address.

Note: This field is displayed only then you select the value User in the Interface Type field.

Default:

000.000.000.000 (IP address)

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Specifies the IP address of the neighboring system.

This field is used by auto-discovery protocols. The neighboring system is the attached device for an

ILMI-enabled interface, or the user-configured IP address for an ILMI-disabled interface.

For an ILMI-enabled interface, any user-configured value overrides the ILMI discovered values.

Enter the IP address of the PSAX chassis (or other device) to which the physical connection is made using this interface.

Default: N/A

Range: 1–20 characters maximum

Format: Alphanumeric

Specifies the name of the neighboring system. This field is used for identifying the device in a network topology. Enter a descriptive name up to 20 alphanumeric characters in length for the PSAX chassis

(or other device) to which the physical connection is made using this interface.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-45

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 4-12. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

UPC Support

UBR Load Balancing

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Disabled

Enabled

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Disabled

Description

Specifies whether usage parameter control (policing) is to be used on this interface. UPC determines if traffic control is performing to the negotiated

PCR, SCR, or MBS values. This feature is supported on the following modules only:

• OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM 1+1 APS/MSP

• OC-3c 1+1 APS SM/MM

• STM-1 1+1 MSP SM/MM

• High Density E1

• 12-Port Medium Density DS1

The feature is supported on the followking channelized DS3 modules only (when the port(s) are channelized to DS0s):

• 1-Port Channelized DS3 Multiservice

• 1-Port DS3 IMA

• Quadserial

Indicates that UPC support is disabled.

Note: If UPC Support is disabled, traffic policing cannot be supported on any VC.

Indicates that UPC support is enabled, providing traffic policing support for all VCs.

Note: Do not enable the UPC Support field and the

Traffic Shaping field at the same time. Your interface configuration will be rejected. However, UPC Support and VI Support are compatible configuration settings.

Specifies whether unspecified bit rate (UBR) load balancing is used or not.

Note: The virtual interface does not support UBR load balancing.

Enabled

Indicates that unspecified bit rate (UBR) load balancing on the interface is disabled.

Indicates that UBR load balancing on the interface is enabled.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-46

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 4-12. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name Field Values

SSCOP Rx Wnd Size Default: 32

Range: 8–32

Format: Numeric

(Packets)

VI Support

[Admin Status]

(display only)

Default: Enabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Enabled

Disabled

Description

Specifies the service-specific, connection-oriented protocol (SSCOP) layer receive window size. This window shows the total number of packets that must be acknowledged by the receiving side before more packets are sent from the transmitting side.

On the receiving side, values must be equal to or greater than the values for the transmit side for fastest transmission rates.

These settings are suggested for connecting to a

PSAX system from a remote site only. The PSAX system configures these settings internally in its own ATM switch.

For more information, see the Application Note entitled Connecting a CBX or GX Switch to a Packet-

Star® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway Via an ATM

Port , Issue 2, Document No. 255-700-236.

Specifies whether virtual interfaces are supported on this interface. Virtual interfaces connect to a module’s physical ports and allow virtual channels

(VCs) to be assigned to virtual trunks, each with its own priority queue. This option is available only on the following modules:

• OC3-c APS MM/SM

• STM-1 MSP MM/SM

• OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM 1+1 APS/MSP

Indicates that VI support is enabled on this interface, providing bandwidth allocation restrictions.

Note: To configure a virtual interface, you must select Enabled . See the the section, “Configuring

Virtual Interfaces,” in this chapter.

Note: Do not enable the UPC Support field and the

Traffic Shaping field at the same time. Your interface configuration will be rejected. However, UPC Support and VI Support are compatible configuration settings.

Indicates that VI support is disabled on this interface.

Displays the administrative status of the interface.

Default:

OutOfService

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

OutOfService

InService

Indicates that the interface is out of service.

Indicates that the interface is in service.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-47

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 4-12. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

[Oper Status]

(display only)

[Ingress Avail BW]

(cps)

(display only)

[Egress Avail BW]

(cps)

(display only)

Traffic Shaping

Field Values

Default:

Unconfigured

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Unconfigured

InService

OutOfService

Default: 0

Range: 0-353207

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Default:

Range: 0-353207

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Default:

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Description

Displays the operational status of the interface.

Indicates that this interface has not been configured.

Indicates that the interface is operational.

Indicates that the interface is not operational.

This represents the total ingress bandwidth available for virtual interfaces. The value 0 changes to

353207 after you select the Apply command. As each new virtual interface is created, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field decreases.

This represents the total egress bandwidth available for virtual interfaces. The value 0 changes to

353207 after you select the Apply command. As each new virtual interface is created, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field decreases.

An input cell selection algorithm (leaky bucket) that smooths bursts of input traffic. Available on these modules:

• STM-1 Multi-Mode and Single-Mode,

• OC-3c Multi-Mode and Single-Mode.

• OC-12c/STM-4c)

Disables the feature.

Enables the feature.

Note: This field must be set to Enabled if using rate shaping on the OC-3c APS or the STM-1 MSP modules prior to egress from an ATM trunk port.

Rate Shaping is not available on the OC-12c/STM-

4c APS/MSP module.

Note: Do not enable Traffic Shaping and UPC Support at the same time. Your interface configuration will be rejected.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-48

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

Bringing One or More ATM UNI Interfaces into Service

Before you can configure a connection using an ATM UNI interface, you must first bring an ATM UNI interface into service. You can do this task from several different windows. To bring one or more interfaces into service, perform the step in the following procedure.

Viewing the Parameters for an ATM UNI Interface

To view a previously configured ATM UNI interface, perform the steps in the following procedure. You should always view an interface and determine whether you have chosen the correct one before you perform any of the procedures in step 3 below.

Begin

1 On the Equipment Configuration window, select the module for which you want to view the interface parameters.

The module configuration window or the port and channel configuration window for the module is displayed.

2 On the module’s port and channel configuration window or the channel configuration window, select the channel and then select the Configure

Interface command.

The ATM UNI Interface Configuration window displaying the parameters for the port and channel you selected is displayed.

3 Proceed to one of the following sections, as needed:

• Bringing One or More ATM UNI Interfaces into Service

• Taking One or More ATM UNI Interfaces out of Service

• Deleting One or More ATM UNI Interfaces

End

Viewing ATM UNI Interface Statistics

To view the statistics for a configured ATM UNI interface, perform the step in the following procedure.

Begin

On the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window, select the ATM UNI

Interface Statistics command.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-49

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

The ATM UNI Interface Statistics window is displayed (see Figure 4-3).

Table 1-3 describes the commands on this window. Table 4-7 describes the display-only fields on this window.

End

Commands

Figure 4-8. ATM UNI Interface Statistics Window

The commands on this window have the following functions:

Command

Continuous Update

Function

Continuously updates all fields once every second.

Reset Statistics Resets statistics counters for this interface.

Go Back to previous screen Redisplays the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window.

Field Descriptions The display-only fields on this window are described on the table below.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-50

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 4-13. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Statistics Window

Field Name

[Errored Cells

Rcvd]

Field Values

[Valid Cells Rcvd] Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2

-1)

Format: exponential notation

Default: 0000000000

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

[Mismatched Cells

Rcvd]

Default: 0000000000

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default:

Description

Specifies the number of valid cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Specifies the number of errored cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Specifies the number of mismatched cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

[Valid Cells Sent] Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2

-1)

Format: exponential notation

[Null Cells Sent]

[Time Elapsed]

Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2 notation

-1)

Format: exponential

Specifies the number of valid cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Specifies the number of null cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Note: This parameter is not supported in the

OC-12c/STM-4c SM/MM 1+1 APS/MSP modules.

Default: 0:00:00

Range: NA

Format: Time in hour

(x), minutes (xx), seconds (xx)

Specifies the time elapsed since the last reset in h:mm:ss (hour: minute:seconds) format.

Taking One or More ATM UNI Interfaces out of Service

You need to take an an ATM UNI interface out of service first before you can perform the following tasks:

• Deleting an interface

• Performing diagnostic or maintenance procedures on an interface

You can do this task from several different windows. To take one or more interfaces out of service, perform the steps in the following procedure.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-51

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

Begin

1 Depending on which type of module you are working with and which window you have currently displayed, select either the Take Interface

Out Of Service or the Take All Interfaces Out Of Service command on the type of window shown in Table 4-3.

Table 4-14. Windows on Which You Can Take an ATM UNI Interface out of Service

• Port and channel configuration window

• ATM UNI Interface Configuration window

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

• ATM UNI Interface Configuration window

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• ATM UNI Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all channel interfaces on a port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• ATM UNI Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

The following prompt is displayed:

Take the interface down Although Not Operational. Continue?

(y/n)

2 Type y to continue.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-52

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

End

The value OutOfService is now displayed in the [Admin Status] and the

Deleting One or More ATM UNI Interfaces

You need to delete an ATM UNI interface before you can replace an interface for a specified port and channel.

Note: Before you can delete an ATM UNI interface, you must first take the interface out of service. See the section, “Taking One or More

ATM UNI Interfaces out of Service.”

You can do this task from several different windows. To delete one or more

ATM UNI interfaces, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

1 Depending on which module you are working with and which window you have currently displayed, select one of the following deletion commands on the type of window shown in Table 4-4:

• Delete All Interfaces

• Delete All Interfaces On This Port

• Delete Interface and Return

Table 4-15. Windows on Which You Can Delete One or More ATM UNI Interfaces

If the module you are working with is: an unchannelized single-port module, you can delete one or more interfaces on these windows:

• Port and channel configuration window

Note: On this window for this type of module, you delete a single interface by selecting Unconfigured in the Interface

Type field.

• ATM UNI Interface Configuration window (deletes the interface for a single channel)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-53

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 4-15. Windows on Which You Can Delete One or More ATM UNI Interfaces

If the module you are working with is: an unchannelized multiport module, a channelized single-port module, a channelized multiport module, you can delete one or more interfaces on these windows:

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

Note: On this window for this type of module, you delete a single interface by selecting Unconfigured in the Interface

Type field.

• ATM UNI Interface Configuration window (deletes the interface for a single channel)

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual DS1 ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window

Note: On this window for this type of module, you delete a single interface by selecting Unconfigured in the Interface

Type field.

• ATM UNI Interface Configuration window (deletes the interface for a single channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all interfaces on one port)

• Channel configuration window

Note: On this window for this type of module, you delete a single interface by selecting Unconfigured in the Interface

Type field.

• ATM UNI Interface Configuration window (deletes the interface for a single channel)

Depending on which module you are working with and which window you you have currently displayed, a prompt similar to one of the following is displayed:

Delete interface: all connections for channel will be lost.

Continue? (y/n)

Are you SURE that you want to delete ALL interfaces for this card? (y/n)

2 Type y to continue.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-54

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing ATM UNI Interfaces

End

The interface is deleted, and any connections provisioned using the interface you just deleted are also automatically deleted.

Modifying an ATM UNI Interface

After you have configured an ATM UNI interface for a specified port and channel, you cannot directly change the parameters for this interface even if it is out of service. The concept for “modifying” (replacing) an ATM UNI interface is that you delete the interface with the parameters you no longer want for a specified port and channel, and then configure a new interface for the same port and channel. Perform the following procedures in the sequence shown to replace an ATM UNI interface that has parameters you do not want.

Begin

1 On the Equipment Configuration window, select the module for which you want to replace an interface.

2 Select the port and channel for the interface you want to replace.

3 View the parameters of the interface you do not want to be sure you are choosing the right one. See the procedure in the section, “Viewing the

Parameters for an ATM UNI Interface.”

4 Take the interface out of service. See the procedure in the section, “Taking One or More ATM UNI Interfaces out of Service.”

Note: After you perform this procedure, the traffic flow on the connection using the interface is stopped.

5 Delete the interface. See the procedure in the section, “Deleting One or

More ATM UNI Interfaces.”

Note: After you perform this procedure, the connection using the interface is automatically deleted from the Connections database.

6 Configure a new interface. See the procedure in the section, “Configuring an ATM UNI Interface.”

7 Bring the newly configured interface into service. See the procedure in the section, “Bringing One or More ATM UNI interfaces into Service.”

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-55

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing CAS Trunkline Interfaces

This section provides instructions for managing interfaces by performing the following tasks:

• Configuring and applying interface(s)

• Bringing interface(s) into service

• Taking interface(s) out of service

• Viewing interface(s)

• Deleting interface(s)

• Viewing interface statistics

Configuring a CAS Trunkline Interface

Begin

Note: You must have the Channelization field on your module port and channel configuration window set to Enabled before you can configure the CAS Trunkline interface.

1 On the CAS Interface Configuration window (see Figure 4-9), select the values for the fields from Figure 4-9. Table 1-1 describes the commands on this window.

2 Go to the next procedure.

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-56

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing CAS Trunkline Interfaces

Figure 4-9. CAS Interface Configuration Window

Command Function

Bring Interface Into Service Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value

InService is displayed in the [Administrative Status] field. This field is displayed when the [Administrative Status] field is

OutOfService .

You must first configure the interface before you can use this command.

Take Out of Service Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. The value

OutOfService is displayed in the

[Administrative Status] field. This field is displayed when the [Administrative Status] field is InService .

You must use this button first before using the Delete button.

Apply Interface Configuration

Applies the configuration field values you set.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-57

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing CAS Trunkline Interfaces

Command Function

Delete Interface and Return Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the port and phannel ponfiguration window for the module you are configuring.

You must first take the interface out of service (using the Take Interface Out of

Service command) before you can use this command.

Go Back to Port Configuration

Redisplays the port and channel configuration window of the module you are configuring.

Table 4-16. Field Descriptions for the CAS Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

ProtocolType

Field Values

Default: Wink-Start

Range: As noted below

Format: predefined

Wink-Start

Description

Specifies the type of CAS protocol to be used. The protocol selected must match that used on the other end of the trunk or line.

Loop-start-network

Loop-start-user

Ground-start-network

A timed off-hook signal of approximately 140 milliseconds, which indicates the availability of an incoming register to receive digital information from the calling office.

Indicates on-hook and off-hook conditions initiated between two central office lines in a voice network when connecting from the telephone set to a switch.

Indicates on-hook and off-hook conditions initiated from the user to a central office in a voice network when connecting from the telephone set to a switch.

Indicates on-hook and off-hook conditions initiated between two central office lines in a voice network once ground detection occurs in both ends of a connection.

Ground-start-user Indicates on-hook and off-hook conditions initiated by the user to the central office in a voice network once ground detection occurs in both ends of a connection.

Itu-t-r2 Indicates that European R2 CAS protocol is used.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-58

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing CAS Trunkline Interfaces

Table 4-16. Field Descriptions for the CAS Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

CAS Direction

Description

Specifies which direction CAS trunk or line will flow.

Both

Field Values

Default: Both

Range: As noted below.

Format: Predefined

ProtocolType

Incoming

Outgoing

Default: Dtmf

Range: As noted below

Format: Predefined

Dtmf

R1-mf

Supports both incoming and outgoing CAS signaling.

Supports incoming CAS signaling only.

Supports outgoing CAS signaling only.

Specifies the addressing type used for the CAS trunk or line.

CAS Group ID

[CAS Bit Pattern

Type]

(display only)

R2-mf

Default:

Format: Predefined

Abcd

Range: As noted below

Range: 0–255

Format: Numeric

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency.

North American Multi-Frequency signaling protocol. Valid only when the ProtocolType is set to wink-start.

European Multi-Frequency signaling protocol.

Valid only when the value Itu-t-r2 is selected in the ProtocolTypeCAS Protocol field.

The identifier to associate a group of CAS trunks or lines which have same reachability. When the

SG is disabled, it must be specified with a nonzero value. When the SG is enabled, the value should be set to zero, which indicates that no routing is to be performed based on the value.

Specifies the type of bit pattern used for supervisory signaling.

Select this value when ESF framing is configured on the Enhanced DS1 module. If you are configuring an E1 module, always use this value.

Select this value for SF framing on any module supporting SF.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-59

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing CAS Trunkline Interfaces

Table 4-16. Field Descriptions for the CAS Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

[Admin Status]

(display only)

Field Values

Default: Unconfigured

Range: As noted below

Format: Predefined

Unconfigured

OutOfService

Description

Specifies the administrative status of the CAS interface.

[Oper Status]

(display only)

InService

The interface for the port is not configured.

The interface has not yet been brought into service, or in-service interface has been set to out of service with the Take Interface Out of Service command.

The interface has been brought into service with the Bring Interface Into Service command.

Specifies the operational status of the CAS interface.

Default: Unconfigured

Range: As noted below

Format: Predefined

Unconfigured

OutOfService

This channel is not operational because the interface is not configured.

The interface has not yet been brought into service, or in-service interface has been set to out of service with the Take Interface Out of Service command.

Two types of errors cause this status.

InService

1. A loss-of-signal condition can exist due to any one of the following:

• The module port is not physically connected to a cable.

• The cable is not connected at the other end to a device.

• The cable is broken.

2. A loss of frame or encoding can exist due to a problem with the framing or encoding of the signal. For example, a repeater could corrupt the signal.

The interface has been brought into service with the Bring Interface Into Service command.

The port is physically connected to a cable; the cable is conducting the signal; and the signal is being transmitted and received correctly.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-60

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing CAS Trunkline Interfaces

Bringing One or More CAS Interfaces Into Service

Before you can configure a connection using an CAS Trunkline interface, you must first bring an CAS Trunkline interface into service. You can do this task from several different windows. To bring one or more interfaces into service, perform the step in the following procedure.

Begin

Table 4-17. Windows on Which You Can Bring an CAS Trunkline Interface into

Service

If the module you are configuring is: you can bring one or more interfaces into service on these windows: a channelized single-port module, a channelized multiport module,

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• CAS Trunkline Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all channel interfaces on a port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• CAS Trunkline Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

After you select the command, the value InService is displayed in the

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-61

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing CAS Trunkline Interfaces

Viewing CAS Trunkline Configuration Parameters

Begin

The CAS Trunkline interface is accessed for viewing by the same path as configuring the interface. This path may vary depending on the module you used (see the Reference Information appendix in this guide for a list of what modules can be used for the interfaces available). You should always view an interface and determine whether you have chosen the correct one before you perform any of the procedures in step 2 below.

1 Return to the Console Interface Main Menu for the module you configured the CAS Trunkline interface on and repeat the navigational steps in the “Configuring an CAS Trunkline Interface” procedure in this guide until you access the ATM CAS Trunkline Interface Configuration window.

2 Proceed to one of the following sections, as needed:

• Bringing One or More ATM UNI Interfaces into Service

• Taking One or More ATM UNI Interfaces out of Service

• Deleting One or More ATM UNI Interfaces

End

Taking One or More CAS Trunkline Interfaces Out of Service

You need to take an an CAS Trunkline interface out of service first before you can perform the following tasks:

• Deleting an interface

• Performing diagnostic or maintenance procedures on an interface

You can do this task from several different windows. To take one or more interfaces out of service, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

1 Depending on which type of module you are working with and which window you have currently displayed, select either the Take Interface

Out Of Service or the Take All Interfaces Out Of Service command on the type of window shown in Table 4-3.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-62

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing CAS Trunkline Interfaces

Table 4-18. Windows on Which You Can Take an CAS Trunkline Interface out of

Service

If the module you are working with is: a channelized single-port module, a channelized multiport module, you can take one or more interfaces out of service on these windows:

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• CAS Trunkline Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all channel interfaces on a port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• CAS Trunkline Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

The following prompt is displayed:

Take the interface down Although Not Operational. Continue?

(y/n)

2 Type y to continue.

The value OutOfService is now displayed in the [Admin Status] and the

End

Deleting One or More CAS Trunkline Interfaces

You need to delete an CAS Trunkline interface before you can replace an interface for a specified port and channel.

Note: Before you can delete an CAS Trunkline interface, you must first take the interface out of service. See the section, “Taking One or

More CAS Trunkline Interfaces out of Service.”

You can do this task from several different windows. To delete one or more

CAS Trunkline interfaces, perform the steps in the following procedure.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-63

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing CAS Trunkline Interfaces

Begin

1 Depending on which module you are working with and which window you have currently displayed, select one of the following deletion commands on the type of window shown in Table 4-4:

• Delete All Interfaces

• Delete All Interfaces On This Port

• Delete Interface and Return

Table 4-19. Windows on Which You Can Delete One or More CAS Trunkline

Interfaces

If the module you are working with is: a channelized single-port module, a channelized multiport module, you can delete one or more interfaces on these windows:

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual DS1 ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window

Note: On this window for this type of module, you delete a single interface by selecting Unconfigured in the Interface

Type field.

• CAS Trunkline Interface Configuration window (deletes the interface for a single channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all interfaces on one port)

• Channel configuration window

Note: On this window for this type of module, you delete a single interface by selecting Unconfigured in the Interface

Type field.

• CAS Trunkline Interface Configuration window (deletes the interface for a single channel)

Depending on which module you are working with and which window you you have currently displayed, a prompt similar to one of the following is displayed:

Delete interface: all connections for channel will be lost.

Continue? (y/n)

Are you SURE that you want to delete ALL interfaces for this card? (y/n)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-64

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing CAS Trunkline Interfaces

2 Type y to continue.

The interface is deleted, and any connections provisioned using the interface you just deleted are also automatically deleted.

End

Modifying One or More CAS Trunkline Interfaces

After you have configured an CAS Trunkline interface for a specified port and channel, you cannot directly change the parameters for this interface even if it is out of service. The concept for “modifying” (replacing) an CAS Trunkline interface is that you delete the interface with the parameters you no longer want for a specified port and channel, and then configure a new interface for the same port and channel. Perform the following procedures in the sequence shown to replace an CAS Trunkline interface that has parameters you do not want.

Begin

1 On the Equipment Configuration window, select the module for which you want to replace an interface.

2 Select the port and channel for the interface you want to replace.

3 View the parameters of the interface you do not want to be sure you are choosing the right one. See the procedure in the section, “Viewing the

Parameters for an CAS Trunkline Interface.”

4 Take the interface out of service. See the procedure in the section, “Taking One or More CAS Trunkline Interfaces out of Service.”

Note: After you perform this procedure, the traffic flow on the connection using the interface is stopped.

5 Delete the interface. See the procedure in the section, “Deleting One or

More CAS Trunkline Interfaces.”

Note: After you perform this procedure, the connection using the interface is automatically deleted from the Connections database.

6 Configure a new interface. See the procedure in the section, “Configuring an CAS Trunkline Interface.”

7 Bring the newly configured interface into service. See the procedure in the section, “Bringing One or More CAS Trunkline interfaces into Service.”

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-65

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Circuit Emulation Interfaces

End

Managing Circuit Emulation Interfaces

This section provides instructions for managing interfaces by performing the following tasks:

• Configuring and applying interface(s)

• Bringing interface(s) into service

• Taking interface(s) out of service

• Viewing interface(s)

• Deleting interface(s)

• Viewing interface statistics

Configuring a Circuit Emulation Interface

This section provides instructions for configuring an I/O module for the circuit emulation interface.

Begin

Note: To display the windows for configuring a circuit emulation interface (see Figure 4-10), you must have completed the following three steps in a previous procedure:

• Selected the value CircuitEmulation in the Interface Type field on the appropriate Port and Channel, DS1 Channel, or Virtual DS1 Channel Configuration window of the module that you are configuring for circuit emulation.

Note: Channel strapping is done before the Apply Configuration step below. (For instructions, see the Port and Channel Configuration chapter of this guide).

• Selected the Apply Configuration command.

• Selected the Configure Interface command. The Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration window (see Figure 4-10) is displayed. Table 1-1 describes the commands for the window. Table 4-20 describes the fields on the window.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-66

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Circuit Emulation Interfaces

8 On the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration window, enter the values in the fields on this window according to the information provided in

Table 4-20.

9 Select the Apply Interface Configuration command to set the valus you selected.

End

Commands

Figure 4-10. Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window

The commands on this window have the following functions:

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-67

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Circuit Emulation Interfaces

Command Function

Bring Interface Into Service Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value

InService is displayed in the [Admin Status] field.

Note: This command is displayed when the [Admin Status] field is

OutOfService . You must first configure the interface before you can use this command.

Take Interface Out of

Service

Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. The value

OutOfService is displayed in the [Admin

Status] field.

Note: This command is displayed when the [Admin Status] field is InService . You must use this command first before using the Delete Interface and Return command.

Add Interface Applies the configuration field values you set.

Delete Interface and Return Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring.

Note: You must first take interface out of service (using the Take Interface Out of

Service command) before you can use this command.

Go Back to Port Configuration

Redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window of the module you are configuring.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-68

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Circuit Emulation Interfaces

Table 4-20. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window

Field Names

CAS Idle abcd Pattern

Field Values

Default: 0

Range: 0–15

Format: Numeric

CAS Busy abcd Pattern

Default: 15

Range: 0–15

Format: Numeric

Description

Displays the Signaling abcd bit pattern for first 2.5 seconds.

Displays the Signaling abcd bit pattern after 2.5 seconds.

Data Pattern Default: 127 (idle pattern)

Range: 0–255

Format: Numeric

TC Final abcd Bits Default: CasBusy

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Displays the data pattern to be transmitted out on a circuit emulation port, if no user data is available for the transmission.

Specifies the bit pattern to be transmitted after

2.5 seconds.

CasBusy

CasIdle

Indicates that CAS busy bit pattern is to be transmitted after 2.5 seconds.

Indicates that CAS idle bit pattern is to betransmitted after 2.5 seconds.

With_Egress_Interface, Left Panel

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-69

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Circuit Emulation Interfaces

Table 4-20. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window

Field Names

DownStream Interworking

[Admin Status]

(display only)

[Oper Status]

(display only)

Field Values

Default: TrunkCond

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Unsupp

OAM

Default:

OutOfService

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

OutOfService

Indicates that OAM interworking will be done with ATM network. The PSAX system will use

ATM OAM cells to send a signal to indicate a connection failure. You can use this value if all the

ATM switches along the connection support ATM

OAM cells.

You must use this value if you selected

Unframed1s in the UpStrmIntrworking field on the Port and Channel Configuration window of the module you are configuring. The PSAX system does not support upstream interworking of unframed 1s with a downstream setting of trunk conditioning.

Right Panel

Indicates whether the interface is configured and brought into service.

InService

Indicates that the interface is not configured and brought into service.

Indicates that the interface is configured and brought into service.

Default:

OutOfService

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

OutOfService

InService

Description

Indicates that trunk conditioning will be done with ATM network. The PSAX system will generate an idle data pattern in the payload of ATM cells to send a signal to indicate a connection failure.

For more information, see the Trunk Conditioning

Application Note for PacketStar

PSAX Multiservice

Media Gateways .

Indicates that no interworking will be done with

ATM network. The PSAX system will not send a signal to indicate a connection failure. Do not choose this value if you want to enable trunk conditioning.

Indicates whether any condition is preventing the interface from passing traffic.

Indicates that a condition is preventing the interface from passing traffic.

Indicates that no condition is preventing the interface from passing traffic.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-70

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Circuit Emulation Interfaces

Bringing a Circuit Emulation Interface Into Service

Begin

Note: You may bring the Circuit Emulation interface into service from either of these windows:

• the module port and channel configuration window, or

• the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window.

Make sure that the module configuration is complete before bringing the interface into service.

To bring the interface into service on the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window, select the Bring Interface Into Service command, (or press Ctrl+N).

The InService value is displayed in the [Admin Status] field.

End

Viewing the Parameters of a Specific Circuit Emulation Interface

Begin

The circuit emulation interface window is accessed for viewing by the same navigational steps as the “Configuring an Interface...” procedure.

This path may vary depending on the module you used (see the Reference Information appendix in this guide for a list of what modules can be used for the interfaces available). You should always view an interface and determine whether you have chosen the correct one before you perform any of the procedures in step 2 below.

1 Return to the Console Interface Main Menu for the module you configured the Circuit Emulation interface on and repeat the steps in the “Configuring a Circuit Emulation Interface” procedure in this guide until you access the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration window.

2 Proceed to one of the following sections, as needed:

• Bringing One or More ATM UNI Interfaces into Service

• Taking One or More ATM UNI Interfaces out of Service

• Deleting One or More ATM UNI Interfaces

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-71

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Circuit Emulation Interfaces

Viewing the Circuit Emulation Module Port Statistics

To view the Circuit Emulation interface statistics, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

The Circuit Emulation Interface Statistics are viewed on the Port Statistics window of the module you are using for the Circuit Emulation Interface.

Access this window from the module port and channel configuration window. See the appropriate module guide for more details on module port statistics windows.

Traffic must have passed on the connection before statistics will display.

End

Taking a Circuit Emulation Interface Out of Service

Note: You may take a Circuit Emulation interface out of service from either of these windows:

• the module port and channel configuration window, or

• the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration window.

Make sure that the module configuration is complete.

Begin

1 To take the interface out of service on the Circuit Emulation Interface

Configuration Window, select the Take Interface Out Of Service command (or press Ctrl+N).

On the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window, the window status line prompts:

Taking the interface down will lose all configurations. Continue? (y/n)

On the module Port and Channel Configuration window, the status line prompts:

Are you SURE that you want to take ALL interfaces out of service? (y/n)

2 Select Y.

The OutOfService value is displayed in the [Admin Status] field.

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-72

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Circuit Emulation Interfaces

Deleting a Circuit Emulation Interface

Begin

Note: You may delete the Circuit Emulation interface from either of these windows:

• the module port and channel configuration window, or

• the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window. In either case, you must first take the interface out of service.

To delete the interface on the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window, proceed as follows:

1 Select the Take Interface Out Of Service command.

On the module Port and Channel Configuration window, the window prompt reads:

Are you SURE that you want to take ALL interfaces out of service? (y/n)

On the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration window, the window prompt reads:

Taking the interface down will cause all SVCs to be lost.

Continue? (y/n)

2 Type Y to continue.

The OutOfService value is displayed in the [Admin Status] field.

3 Select the Delete Interface and Return command and press Enter.

On the module Port and Channel Configuration window, the window prompt reads:

Are you SURE that you want to take ALL interfaces out of service? (y/n)

On the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration window, the window prompt reads:

Are you SURE that you want to delete this interface? (y/n)

4 Press Y The interface is deleted and you are returned to the port and channel configuration window.

End

Modifying a Circuit Emulation Interface

After you have configured an Circuit Emulation interface for a specified port and channel, you cannot directly change the parameters for this interface even if it is out of service. The concept for “modifying” (replacing) an Circuit

Emulation interface is that you delete the interface with the parameters you no longer want for a specified port and channel, and then configure a new

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-73

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces interface for the same port and channel. Perform the following procedures in the sequence shown to replace an Circuit Emulation interface that has parameters you do not want.

Begin

1 On the Equipment Configuration window, select the module for which you want to replace an interface.

2 Select the port and channel for the interface you want to replace.

3 View the parameters of the interface you do not want to be sure you are choosing the right one. See the procedure in the section, “Viewing the

Parameters for an Circuit Emulation Interface.”

4 Take the interface out of service. See the procedure in the section, “Taking One or More Circuit Emulation Interfaces Out of Service.”

Note: After you perform this step, the traffic flow on the connection using the interface is stopped.

5 Delete the interface. See the procedure in the section, “Deleting One or

More Circuit Emulation Interfaces.”

Note: After you perform this step, the connection using the interface is automatically deleted from the Connections database.

6 Configure a new interface. See the procedure in the section, “Configuring a Circuit Emulation Interface.”

7 Bring the newly configured interface into service. See the procedure in the section, “Bringing One or More Circuit Emulation interfaces into Service.”

End

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

This section provides instructions for managing interfaces by performing the following tasks:

• Configuring and applying interface(s)

• Bringing interface(s) into service

• Taking interface(s) out of service

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-74

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

• Viewing interface(s)

• Deleting interface(s)

• Viewing interface statistics

Configuring the Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface

This section provides instructions for configuring a PSAX I/O module for the frame relay user or network interface. Use the same window to configure either interface. To set the values for the frame relay interface, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

After you apply the value FrameRelayUni or FrameRelayNni as the interface type on a channel configuration window associated with one of the modules above, the Frame Relay Interface Configuration window (see

Figure 4-11) is displayed. Table 1-1 describes the commands on the window.

Table 4-21 describes the fields on the window.

1 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in

Table 4-21.

2 To apply the interface configuration values, select the Apply Interface

Configuration command and press Enter.

The value InService is displayed in the [Operational Status] field.

Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interfaces into Service” procedure in this guide.

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-75

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

Commands

Figure 4-11. Frame Relay Interface Configuration Window

The commands in this window have the following functions:

Command

Apply Interface Configuration

Function

Applies the configuration field value you set.

Reset Interface Display Resets the fields to the last set of applied values.

Bring Interface Into

Service (displayed when the [Admin Status] field is OutOfService)

Take Interface Out of

Service (displayed when the [Admin Status] field is InService)

Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value InService is displayed in the [Admin Status] field.

You must first configure the interface before you can use this command.

Takes an in-service configured interface to outof-service status. The value OutOfService is displayed in the [Admin Status] field.

You must use this command first before using the Delete Interface and Return command.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-76

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

Command

Delete Interface and

Return

Continuous Update

Function

Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the port and channel configuration window for the module you are configuring.

You must first take interface out of service

(using the Take Interface Out of Service command) before you can use this command.

Continuously updates the information in the fields every second. Select this command and press return to turn the continuous updating on and off as needed (similar to a toggle switch).

Reset Statistics Removes the values in the Interface Statistics fields and sets them to the value 0 .

View Frame Relay LMI

Statistics

Displays the LMI statistics for this interface.

View FR LMI DLCI Status

Displays the LMI DLCI status of this interface.

Go Back to Port Configuration

Redisplays the port and channel configuration window of the module you are configuring.

Table 4-21. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

[Admin Status]

(display only)

[LMI Oper Status]

(display only)

[Oper Status]

(display only)

Field Values

InService

OutOfService

Default:

OutOfService

InService

OutOfService

InService

TwoOctets10Bits

Description

Indicates that the interface is in service.

Indicates that the interface is not in service.

Indicates that the local management interface

(LMI) is not operational.

Indicates that the local management interface is operational.

Indicates that the interface is not operational.

Indicates that the interface is operational.

Type of data link connection identifier (DLCI) format used.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-77

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

Table 4-21. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

DLCMI State

Field Values

Default: NoLmi

(for frame relay UNI only)

Description

No local management interface (LMI).

Note: If you select this value, the fields described in this table after Over Subscription will not appear.

LMI is a DTE device.

Over

Subscription

LmiDte

(for frame relay UNI only)

LmiDce

(for frame relay UNI only)

LmiNni

(for frame relay NNI only)

Default: 10

Range: 1–10

LMI is a DCE device.

Local management interface is used with network-to-network interface.

LMI Protocol

LMI

Asynchronous

Interworking Type

Throughput

N391

N392

Default:

Ansi

ATT

None

Enabled

Disabled

Default:

Frf5

Default:

K56

Default: 006

Range: 1–255

Default:

Ccitt

Frf8

K64

Range: 1–10

The connection admission control takes into account the oversubscription factor when determining if a connection can be made.

Protocol uses Annex A (ITU Q.933, reference

RFR.1).

Protocol uses Annex D (ANSI T2.617).

LMI protocol.

Use of local management interface is disabled.

This mode sends LMI message whenever there is a status change.

This mode waits for regular LMI polling cycle.

FRF.8 (Frame Relay Forum Implementation

Agreement)—frame relay to ATM PVC service interworking.

FRF.5 (Frame Relay Forum Implementation

Agreement)—frame relay to ATM PVC service interworking.

The throughput bandwidth of the interface, in kb.

System parameter counter for full status (status of all PVCs) polling, used with user and network.

This parameter always applies to the user equipment. It applies to the user and network if the optional bidirectional network procedures are invoked.

System parameter counter for error threshold, used with user and network.

The value of parameter N392 should be less than or equal to N393.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-78

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

Table 4-21. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay Interface Configuration Window

N393

Field Name

T391

T392

NT3

Field Values

Default: 04

Range: 1–10

Default: 10

Range: 5–30

Default:

Range: 5–30

Default:

Range: 5–30

Description

System parameter counter for counting of monitored events, used with user and network.

If the value of parameter N393 is set to one much less than N391, then the link could go in and out of error-condition without the user equipment or network being notified.

System parameter timer for link integrity verification polling, measured in seconds. When the time expires, status enquiry is transmitted and error is recorded if status message is not received.

Parameter T391 always applies to the user. It applies to the user and network if the optional bidirectional network procedures are invoked.

System parameter timer for polling verification, measured in seconds. When the time expires, error is recorded by incrementing the value for parameter counter N392, and the timer is restarted.

Parameter T392 always applies to the network. It applies to the network and user equipment if the optional bedirectional network procedures are invoked. The value of parameter T392 should be greater than the one for T391.

Message frequency timer, relevant for ATT LMI only.

Bringing One or More Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interfaces Into Service

Before you can configure a connection using an Frame Relay UNI or NNI interface, you must first bring an Frame Relay UNI or NNI interface into service. You can do this task from several different windows. To bring one or more interfaces into service, perform the step in the following procedure.

Begin

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-79

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

Table 4-22. Windows on Which You Can Bring an Frame Relay UNI or NNI

Interface into Service

If the module you are configuring is: an unchannelized single-port module, an unchannelized multiport module, a channelized single-port module, a channelized multiport module, you can bring one or more interfaces into service on these windows:

• Port and channel configuration window

• Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface Configuration window

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

• Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface Configuration window

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all channel interfaces on a port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

After you select the command, the value InService is displayed in the

End

Viewing One or More Frame Relay UNI or NNI LMI DLCI Parameters

Complete the procedure below to view the Frame Relay Interface DLCIs from the Frame Relay Interface Configuration window (see the “Configuring the

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-80

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface” procedure for instructions on accessing the Frame Relay Interface Configuration window).

Begin

1 To display the current frame relay interface data link connection identifiers (DLCIs), select the View FR LMI DLCI Status command on the

Frame Relay Interface Configuration window.

The Frame Relay LMI DLCI Status Table window is displayed (see

Figure 4-12). Table 1-4 describes the commands on the window.

Table 4-23 describes the display-only fields on the window.

2 Go to the next procedure.

End

Commands

Figure 4-12. Frame Relay LMI DLCI Status Window

The commands on this window have the following functions:

Command

Find DLCI:

Go Back to Previous

Menu

Function

Searches this table by the value you enter in the DLCI field.

Displays the Frame Relay Interface Configuration window.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-81

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

Table 4-23. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay LMI DLCI Status Table Window

DLCI

Status change time stamp

Total:

0/0

Field

Oper Status

Description

This column displays the data link connection identifiers

(DLCIs) for all the frame relay interfaces in the PSAX system.

This column displays the operational status of all frame relay interfaces in the PSAX system.

This column displays the dates/times for the last time the operational status of frame relay interfaces was changed.

The first number in this field indicates the number of the

DLCI entry on the first line of the currently displayed window. The second number indicates the total number of DLCI entries for this connection type.

Viewing Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface Statistics

You can view two types of frame relay statistics from the Frame Relay UNI or

NNI Interface Configuration window:

• Interface statistics—see the procedure “Viewing FR Interface Statistics” in section below

• Link management interface (LMI) statistics—see the procedure“Viewing

Frame Relay LMI Statistics” in section below

Viewing FR Interface Statistics

Begin

On the Frame Relay Interface Configuration window (see Figure 4-10), select the View FR Interface Statistics command.

The Frame Relay LMI Statistics window is displayed (see Figure 4-13).

Table 1-6 describes the commands on the window. Table 4-24 describes the display-only fields on the window.

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-82

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

Commands

Figure 4-13. Frame Relay Interface Statistics Window

The commands in this window have the following functions:

Command

Continuous Update

Reset Statistics

Function

Continuously updates the information in the fields every second. Select this command and press return to turn the continuous updating on and off as needed (similar to a toggle switch).

Removes the values in the fields and sets them to the value 0 .

Go Back to Previous Screen Redisplays the Frame Relay InterfaceConfiguration window.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-83

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

Table 4-24. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay Interface Statistics Window

Field Name

[Cells Encoded ]

(display only)

[Cells Decoded]

(display only)

[Frames Encoded]

(display only)

[Frames Decoded]

(display only)

[Frames Mismatched]

(display only)

[Errored Frames]

(display only)

[AAL5 Errors]

(display only)

[Time Elapsed]

(display only)

Description

Number of cells encoded going into interface side

A during the amount of time shown in Time

Elapsed field.

Number of cells decoded going out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time

Elapsed field.

Number of frames encoded going into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time

Elapsed field.

Number of frames decoded going out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time

Elapsed field.

Number of mismatched cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in

Time Elapsed field.

Number of errored frames received during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Number of ATM adaptation layer 5 (AAL5) errors going into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Time in hours, minutes and seconds, since the last time the Reset Statistics command was entered. The format is HH:MM:SS .

Viewing Frame Relay LMI Statistics

Begin

On the Frame Relay Interface Configuration window (see Figure 4-10), select the View Frame Relay LMI Statistics command and press Enter.

The Frame Relay LMI Statistics window is displayed (see Figure 4-14).

Table 1-8 describes the commands on the window. Table 4-25 describes the display-only fields on the window.

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-84

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

Commands

Figure 4-14. Frame Relay LMI Statistics Window

The commands in this window have the following functions:

Command

Continuous Update

Reset Statistics

Go Back to Frame

Relay Configuration

Function

Continuously updates the information in the fields every second. Select this command and press return to turn the continuous updating on and off as needed (similar to a toggle switch).

Removes the values in the fields and sets them to the value 0 .

Redisplays the Frame Relay InterfaceConfiguration window.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-85

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

Table 4-25. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay LMI Statistics Window

Field Name

[Receive Status]

(display only)

[Enquiries

Received]

(display only)

[Asynchronous

Enquiries Received]

(display only)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Transmit Status

(display only)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

[Enquiries

Transmitted]

(display only)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

[Asynchronous

Enquiries

Transmitted]

(display only)

[T392 Expirations]

(display only)

[Packets Discarded]

(display only)

[Link Resets]

(display only)

[Time Elapsed]

(display only)

Field Values

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 00:00:00

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Description

Number of status messages received.2

Number of status enquiry messages received.

Number of asynchronous status messages received.

Number of status messages transmitted.

Number of status enquiry messages transmitted.

Number of asynchronous status messages transmitted.

Polling verification timer expires.

Number of LMI messages discarded due to invalid length, receive sequence numbers, or other error.

Number of times interface operational status was in service after the system startup.

Time elapsed since last reset.

Taking One or More Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interfaces Out of Service

Use this procedure to take an interface out of service only after it is in service.

If the interface you want to take out of service is not already in service, you will not see the Take Interface Out of Service Command on the interface configuration window.

On a module configuration, module channel configuration, or module interface configuration window:

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-86

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

• the [Oper Status] field indicates InService or OutOfService

• the [Admin Status] field indicates InService or OutOfService

On a module port and channel configuration window:

• the Chnl_OperStatus_ field indicates the service status. An asterisk character after the interface type in the Chnl_OperStatus_ field indicates the interface is not in service; the absence of the asterisk indicates the interface is in service. Look in the command field at the bottom of each of these windows for the command to take the interface(s) out of service, and select it if necessary.

For some fields on the Frame Relay Interface Configuration window, you need to take an Frame Relay UNI or NNI interface out of service first before you can perform the following tasks. See the “Modifying One or More Frame

Relay UNI or NNI Interfaces” procedure in this guide for more infomation:

• Deleting an interface

• Performing diagnostic or maintenance procedures on an interface

You can do this task from several different windows (see Table 4-3). To take one or more interfaces out of service, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

1 Depending on the module you are using, select either the Take Interface Out Of Service or the Take All Interfaces Out Of Service command on the type of window shown in Table 4-3.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-87

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

Table 4-26. Windows on Which You Can Take an Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface

Out of Service

• Port and channel configuration window

• Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface Configuration window

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

• Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface Configuration window

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all channel interfaces on a port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

The window status line prompts:

Taking the interface down will cause all SVCs to be lost.

Continue? (y/n)

2 Select Y.

Relay UNI or NNI Interfaces into Service).

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-88

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing Frame Relay Interfaces

Deleting One or More Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface

The interface must be out of service before it can be deleted. To take an interface out of service, select the Take Interface Out Of Service command on the Frame Relay Interface Configuration window, or see the “Taking One or

More Interfaces Out of Service“ procedure in this guide. To delete an interface, perform the steps below.

Begin

On the Frame Relay Interface Configuration window, select the Delete

Interface and Return command.

1 On the Interface Configuration window, select the Take Interface Out of Service Command.

The window status line prompts:

Taking the interface down will cause all SVCs to be lost.

Continue? (y/n)

2 Select Y.

3 Select the Delete Interface and Return command.

The window status line prompts:

Are you sure that you want to delete this interface?

4 Select Y.

The window returns to channel configuration window of the module from which the interface was just deleted.

You may also delete an interface from the port and channal configuration window of the module configured for the interface. If the interface is in service you must select the Take All interfaces Out of Service command, then select the Delete All Interfaces On This Port command.

5 If you need to delete more interfaces on a port or channel, repeat steps 1 through 4.

End

Modifying a Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interface

To change values on the Frame Relay Interface Configuration window (see

Figure 4-11), you must first take the interface out of service (see the Taking

One or More Frame Relay Interfaces Out of Service” procedure in this guide).

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-89

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

GR-303 Interface

You can change the values only in the following fields without first deleting the interface:

• DLCMI State

• LMI Protocol

• LMI Asynchronous

• N391

• N392

•

N393

T391

T392

NT3

Note: To change any other fields on the Frame Relay Interface Configuration window, you must first delete the interface. To delete an interface, follow the instructions in “Deleting One or More Frame

Relay Interfaces” in this guide.

To change field values, perform the steps the following procedure on the

Frame Relay Interface Configuration window.

Begin

1 Change the values in the fields as needed on the Frame Relay Interface

Configuration window (to access the window, see the “Configuring the

Frame Relay Interface” procedure).

2 Select the Apply Interface Configuration command.

3 To bring the interface back into service, select the Bring Interface Into

Service command .

(For more information on other windows on which you can bring interfaces into service, see the “Bringing One or More

Frame Relay UNI or NNI Interfaces Into Service” procedure in this guide).

End

GR-303 Interface

Examples on how to configure GR-303 interface groups using the DSP2C and

DSP2D Voice Server modules are provided in the Configuring the GR-303 Voice

Gateway User Guide, Document Number 255-700-135.

This user guide also includes a list of modules certified as interoperable with other call processing devices, such as the Lucent CellPipe

™

IAD and the CO 5ESS switch.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-90

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing HDLC Passthrough Interfaces

This section provides instructions for managing interfaces by performing the following tasks:

• Configuring and applying interface(s)

• Bringing interface(s) into service

• Taking interface(s) out of service

• Viewing interface(s)

• Deleting interface(s)

• Viewing interface statistics

Configuring the HDLC Passthrough Interface

Perform the following steps to set the values for the HDLC Passthrough interface.

Begin

1 Select the values for the HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration window from Figure 4-15. Table 1-1 describes the commands on the window.

2 To apply the values, select the Apply Interface Configuration command.

The value InService displays in the [Operational Status] field.

3 Proceed with the “Bringing the HDLC Pass Through Interface into Service” procedure.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-91

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing HDLC Passthrough Interfaces

Commands

Figure 4-15. HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration Window

The commands in this window have the following functions:

Command Function

Bring Interface Into Service

(displayed when the [Admin

Status] field is OutOfService )

Take Interface Out of Service

(displayed when the [Admin

Status] field is InService )

Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value

InService is displayed in the [Admin

Status] field. You must first configure the interface before you can use this command.

Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. The value

OutofService is displayed in the [Admin

Status] field. You must use this command first before using the Delete Interface and Return command.

Out of Service command) before you can use this command.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-92

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing HDLC Passthrough Interfaces

Command Function

View HDLC Interface Statistics

Displays the HDLC Passthrough Interface

Statistics window.

Go Back to Port Configuration

Redisplays the port and channel configuration window of the module you are configuring.

Table 4-27. Field Descriptions for the HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

[Admin Status]

(display only)

Field Values

Default: OutOfService

Range: As noted below

Format: Predefined

InService

Description

Indicates whether any condition is affecting the port operation with the interface.

OutOfService

Indicates that no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational with an interface.

Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from working with an interface.

Indicates that the interface is not operational.

[Oper Status]

(display only)

Default: OutOfService

Range: As noted below

Format: Predefined

InService

OutOfService

HDLC Throughput Default: K64

Range: As noted below

Format: Predefined

K64

K56

Indicates that the interface is operational.

Indicates that the interface is not operational.

Specifies the tranmission speed between terminations in kilobits per second.

Note: This field is supported only on the following modules:

• 1-Port Channelized DS3 Multiservice

• 1-Port Channelized STS-1e, T1 Format

• 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice

The throughput bandwith of the interface is

64 Kbps, or one DS0.

The throughput bandwith of the interface is

56 Kbps.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-93

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing HDLC Passthrough Interfaces

Table 4-27. Field Descriptions for the HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

HDLC

DataInversion

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: As noted below

Format: Predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Description

Specifies whether whether HDLC data inversion is to be performed by the I/O module for this interface.

Note: This field is supported only on the following modules:

• 1-Port Channelized DS3 Multiservice

• 1-Port Channelized STS-1e, T1 Format

• 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice

HDLC data inversion will not be performed.

HDLC data inversion will be performed.

DSP Wireless Backhaul Applications: Use SAR type AAL5 on your Packet Pipe IWF configuration if no DSPs are available. Use SAR type AAL2 if a DSP2E/F is available.

End

Bringing One or More HDLC Pass Through Interfaces into Service

Before you can configure a connection using an HDLC Passthrough interface, you must first bring an HDLC Passthrough interface into service. You can do this task from several different windows. To bring one or more interfaces into service, perform the step in the following procedure.

Begin

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-94

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing HDLC Passthrough Interfaces

Table 4-28. Windows on Which You Can Bring an HDLC Pass Through Interface into Service

• Port and channel configuration window

• HDLC Passthrough Interface Configuration window

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

• HDLC Passthrough Interface Configuration window

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• HDLC Passthrough Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all channel interfaces on a port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• HDLC Passthrough Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

After you select the command, the value InService is displayed in the

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-95

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing HDLC Passthrough Interfaces

Viewing the HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration Parameters

Begin

The HDLC Passthrough interface is accessed for viewing by the navigational steps as the steps for configuring the interface. This path may vary depending on the module you used (see the Reference Information appendix in this guide for a list of what modules can be used for the interfaces available). You should always view an interface and determine whether you have chosen the correct one before you perform any of the procedures in step 2 below.

1 Return to the Console Interface Main Menu for the module you configured the HDLC Passthrough interface on and repeat the steps in the

“Configuring an HDLC Passthrough Interface” procedure in this guide until you access the HDLC Passthrough Interface Configuration window.

2 Proceed to one of the following sections, as needed:

• Bringing One or More HDLC Passthrough Interfaces into Service

• Taking One or More HDLC Passthrough Interfaces out of Service

• Deleting One or More HDLC Passthrough Interfaces

End

Viewing HDLC Pass Through Interface Statistics

Begin

On the HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration window (see

Figure 4-14), select the View HDLC Interface Statistics command (or press Ctrl+V).

The HDLC Pass Through Interface Statistics window is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-16. Table 1-4 describes the commands for the window. Table 4-29 describes the field values for the window.

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-96

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing HDLC Passthrough Interfaces

Figure 4-16. HDLC Pass Through Interface Statistics Window

Command

Continuous Update

Reset Statistics

Go Back to Previous

Screen

Function

Updates the values in the fields every second.

Sets all field values to 0 .

Redisplays the HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration window.

Table 4-29. Field Descriptions for the HDLC Passthrough Interface Statistics Window

Field Name

[Cells Encoded]

(display only)

[Cells Decoded]

(display only)

[Frames Encoded ]

(display only)

Field Values

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Description

Provides a count of the incoming cells from the outside media to the I/O port over this interface since the last reset.

Provides a count of the outgoing cells from the

I/O port to the outside media over this interface since the last reset.

Provides a count of the number of encoded frames transmitted by the I/O port over this interface since the last reset.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-97

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing HDLC Passthrough Interfaces

Table 4-29. Field Descriptions for the HDLC Passthrough Interface Statistics Window

Field Name

[Frames Decoded]

(display only)

[Frames

Mismatched]

(display only)

[Errored Frames]

(display only)

[AAL5 Errors]

(display only)

[Time Elapsed]

(display only)

Field Values

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 00:00:00

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

( HH:MM:SS )

Description

Provides a count of the number of encoded frames received by the I/O port over this interface since the last reset.

Provides a count of the number of mismatched frames received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Provides a count of the number of errored frames received by the I/O port over this interface since the last reset.

Provides a count of the number of (ATM adaptation layer 5) errors going into interface side A during the amount of time shown in the Time

Elapsed field.

Displays the time, in hours, minutes and seconds, since the last statistics window reset.

Taking One or More Interfaces Out of Service

Use this procedure to take an interface out of service only after it is in service.

If the interface you want to take out of service is not already in service, you will not see the Take Interface Out of Service Command on the interface configuration window.

On a module configuration, module channel configuration, or module interface configuration window:

• the [Oper Status] field indicates InService or OutOfService

• the [Admin Status] field indicates InService or OutOfService

On a module port and channel configuration window:

You need to take an ATM IISP interface out of service first before you can perform the following tasks:

• Deleting an interface

• Performing diagnostic or maintenance procedures on an interface

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-98

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing HDLC Passthrough Interfaces

You can do this task from several different windows (see Table 4-3). To take one or more interfaces out of service, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

1 Depending on the module you are using, select either the Take Interface Out Of Service or the Take All Interfaces Out Of Service command on the type of window shown in Table 4-3.

Table 4-30. Windows on Which You Can Take an HDLC Passthrough Interface Out of Service

• Port and channel configuration window

• HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration window

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

• HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration window

• Port configuration window (all interfaces for all virtual ports)

• Virtual port configuration window (all channel interfaces on a virtual port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• Module configuration window (all interfaces for all ports)

• Port and channel configuration window

(all channel interfaces on a port)

• Channel configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

• HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration window (just the interface for the channel)

The window status line prompts:

Taking the interface down will cause all SVCs to be lost.

Continue? (y/n)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-99

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing HDLC Passthrough Interfaces

2 Select Y.

Passthrough Interfaces into Service).

End

Deleting One or More HDLC Passthrough Interfaces

Begin

You need to delete an HDLC Pass Through interface before you can replace an interface for a specified port and channel.

Note: Before you can delete an HDLC Passthrough interface, you must first take the interface out of service. See the section, “Taking One or More HDLC Passthrough Interfaces out of Service.”

You can do this task from several different windows. To delete one or more

HDLC Pass Through interfaces, perform the steps in the following procedure.

1 On the HDLC Pass Through Interface Configuration window, select the

Take Interface Out of Service Command.

The window status line prompts:

Taking the interface down will cause all SVCs to be lost.

Continue? (y/n)

2 Select y.

3 Select the Delete Interface and Return command.

The interface is deleted and the window status line says:

Are you sure that you want to delete this interface?

4 Select y.

The window returns to channel configuration window of the module from which the interface was just deleted.

You may also delete an interface from the port and channal configuration window of the module configured for the HDLC Passthrough interface. If the interface is in service you must select the Take All interfaces Out of Service command, then select the Delete All Interfaces On This

Port command.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-100

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing HDLC Passthrough Interfaces

5 If you need to delete more HDLC interfaces on a port or channel, repeat steps 1 through 4.

End

Modifying Interface Values

After you have configured an HDLC Passthrough interface for a specified port and channel, you cannot directly change the parameters for this interface even if it is out of service. The concept for “modifying” (replacing) an HDLC

Passthrough interface is that you delete the interface with the parameters you no longer want for a specified port and channel, and then configure a new interface for the same port and channel. Perform the following procedures in the sequence shown to replace an HDLC Passthrough interface that has parameters you do not want.

Begin

1 On the Equipment Configuration window, select the module for which you want to replace an interface.

2 Select the port and channel for the interface you want to replace.

3 View the parameters of the interface you do not want to be sure you are choosing the right one. See the procedure in the section, “Viewing the

Parameters for an HDLC Passthrough Interface.”

4 Take the interface out of service. See the procedure in the section, “Taking One or More HDLC Passthrough Interfaces out of Service.”

Note: After you perform this procedure, the traffic flow on the connection using the interface is stopped.

5 Delete the interface. See the procedure in the section, “Deleting One or

More HDLC Passthrough Interfaces.”

Note: After you perform this procedure, the connection using the interface is automatically deleted from the connections database.

6 Configure a new interface. See the procedure in the section, “Configuring an HDLC Passthrough Interface.”

7 Bring the newly configured interface into service. See the procedure in the section, “Bringing One or More HDLC Passthrough interfaces into

Service.”

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-101

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing PRI ISDN Interfaces

This section provides procedures on performing the following tasks:

• Configuring and applying interface(s)

• Bringing interface(s) into service

• Taking interface(s) out of service

• Viewing interface(s)

• Deleting interface(s)

• Viewing interface statistics

Accessing/Viewing the Enhanced ISDN LAPD and BChannel Configuration

Window

This section provides instructions for configuring an I/O module for the PRI

ISDN User/Network interface.

To configure the PRI ISDN network or user interface, you must have already configured settings for your PSAX system in the site-specific conguration stage and in the DS1 port configuration stage. You must set up specific values on the Call Control Resource Allocation Configuration window and the TCP

Server Configuration window (see Chapter 4 of the appropriate PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway user guide). Also you must enable the signalling gateway (SG) feature on the port configuration window for the modules listed below.

If you selected the value Pri-isdn-network or Pri-isdn-user as the interface type, the Enhanced ISDN LAPD and BChannel Configuration window is displayed (see Figure 4-17).

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-102

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing PRI ISDN Interfaces

Figure 4-17. Enhanced ISDN LAPD and BChannel Configuration Window

The commands in this window have the following functions:

Command

Apply Interface Configuration

Reset Interface Display

Bring Interface Into Service

Take Interface Out of Service

Function

Applies the configuration field values you set.

Resets the fields to the last set of applied values.

Displays when the [Admin Status] field is

OutOfService . Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. Brings an outof-service configured interface to in-service status. The value InService is displayed in the

[AdminStatus] field.

You must first configure the interface before you can use this command.

Displays when the [Admin Status] field is

InService . Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status.Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status.

The value OutOfService is displayed in the

[Admin Status] field.

You must use this command first before using the Delete Interface and Return command.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-103

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing PRI ISDN Interfaces

Command

Delete Interface and Return

Function

Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring.

You must first take interface out of service

(using the Take Interface Out of Service command) before you can use this command.

Apply BChannel Configuration Applies the BChannel Admin Status values you set.

Reset BChannel Display Refreshes the fields to the last set of applied values.

Bring All BChannels Into Service Displays when the [Admin Status] field is

OuOfService . Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. Brings an outof-service configured BChannel to in-service status. The value InService is displayed in the

[Admin Status] field.

Take All BChannels Out of Service

Go Back to Channel Configuration

Displays when the [Admin Status] field is

InService . Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. Takes an in-service configured BChannel to out-of-service status.

The value OutOfService is displayed in the

[Admin Status] field.

Redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring.

Configuring the PRI ISDN Interface

Begin

To set the values for the PRI ISDN interface, perform the steps in the following procedure.

1 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in

Table 4-31.

2 To apply the interface configuration values, select the Apply Interface

Configuration command.

The value OutOfService is displayed in the [Operational Status] field.

3 To apply the BChannel configuration values, select the Apply BChannel Configuration command.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-104

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Managing PRI ISDN Interfaces

End

The value OutOfService is displayed in the [Operational Status] field.

Table 4-31. Field Descriptions for the Enhanced ISDN LAPD and B Channel Configuration Window

Field Name

[Oper Status]

(display only)

Values

InService

[Admin Status]

(display only)

OutOfService

InService

OutOfService

DChannel Number Default: 00

Range: 0–24

Format: numeric

[Status]

(display only)

Default:

Not-initiated

[State]

(display only)

T200

T203

N200

N201

Window Size (K)

Indicates that the interface is operational.

Indicates that the interface is not operational.

Indicates that the interface is in service.

Indicates that the interface is not in service.

If the D Channel number is 0 , the LAP-D will not be enabled.

Description

The operational status of the ISDN Layer 2. Notinitiated means that the first SETUP message has not been transmitted and the L2 establishment procedure has not yet been initiated.

The current state of the ISDN Layer 2 protocol.

Tei-unassigned, tei-assigned, waitingestablishment, awaiting-release, multiple-frameestablished, timer-recovery

Default: 01.0 Secs

Range: 0.1–10.0

Format: numeric, in

1/10 seconds

Default: 10 Secs

Range: 1–60

Format: seconds

Default: 3 Times

Range: 1–5

Format: numeric

The value of the L2 T200 timer.

The value of the L2 T203 timer

The maximum number of retransmissions before the LAP-D link is declared to be not operational.

Default: 260 Octets

Range: 1–300

Format: numeric

Default: 007 Frames

Range: 1–127

Format: numeric

The maximum number of octets in an information field.

The maximum number of outstanding I frames.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-105

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Provisioning Connections

Bringing the Interface Into Service

Before you can configure a connection using an PRI ISDN interface, you must first bring an PRI ISDN interface into service. To bring one or more interfaces into service, perform the step in the following procedure.

Begin

4 Select the Bring Interface Into Service command.

The value InService is displayed in the [Operational Status] field.

5 To activate the interface after you have applied the configuration values, select the Bring All BChannels Into Service command.

The value InService is displayed in the [BChnl Admin Status] field.

After you select the command, the value InService is displayed in the

End

Provisioning Connections

For instructions on configuring connections, see your PacketStar

PSAX

System Provisioning Connections User Guide for PacketStar

PSAX Multiservice

Media Gateways 255-700-377 . In using that guide, keep in mind that the following connection types are supported by the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1

Multiservice module:

• PVC connections:

~ ATM-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC)

~ ATM-to-ATM virtual path connection (VPC)

~ Bridge-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) (z)

~ Circuit Emulation-to ATM virtual channel connection (VCC)

~ Circuit Emulation-to Circuit Emulation

~ Frame relay-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) connection

~ Frame relay-to-frame relay connection

~ In-band management IP PVC connection

~ Variable bit rate (VBR)-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC)

~ Variable bit rate (VBR)-to-VBR connection

~ AAL2 Trunk Connection (w)

• SVC connections:

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-106

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Provisioning Connections

~ ATM-to-ATM virtual channel connection VCC (n)

~ ATM IISP CBR connection

~ ATM IISP VBR connection

• SPVC connections:

~ ATM-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) (z)

~ Circuit Emulation-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) (y)

~ Circuit Emulation-to-ATM Std AAL2 virtual channel connection (VCC)

~ Frame relay-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) SPVC connection

~ Variable bit rate (VBR)-to-ATM virtual channel connection (VCC) (w)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

4-107

Chapter 4 Configuring the Interfaces Using the Console Interface

Provisioning Connections

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

4-108

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Part 3: AQueView Operation

Configuring Ports and Channels

Using the AQueView

®

EMS

Overview of This Chapter

This chapter describes how to use the AQueView EMS to perform the following tasks:

• Setting the values for the port and channel configuration of the 12-Port

Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module

• Saving the module configuration and logging off

Before You Begin

Be sure to complete the following tasks first before configuring the 12-Port

Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module:

• Navis ™ AQueView

Element Management System User Guide ).

• Set the values to configure your PSAX device (see the appropriate Navis ™

AQueView

Element Management System User Guide ).

• Set the values to configure the Stratum 3–4 module (see the appropriate

Navis ™ AQueView

Element Management System User Guide ).

When configuring the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module using the AQueView EMS, display-only fields are displayed as “ghosted,” or gray.

Loopback Configuration Options

Using the Right-Click Menu

You can perform various functions in the AQueView system by clicking the right mouse button. This section describes the right-click menu options you can use in the various windows in the AQueView system when configuring ports and channels.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

5-1

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Using the Right-Click Menu

Configuring Ports and Channels

Figure 5-1. Sample Port Configuration (Displaying Right-Click Menu)

Figure 5-2. Sample Channel Configuration (Displaying Right-Click Menu)

Table 5-1.

Configure

Option

Bring All Interfaces Into

Service

Take All Interfaces Out of

Service

Delete All Interfaces

Channel Selection

Function

Opens the port and channel configuration window of a module.

Sets all configured interfaces on a channel administratively into service.

Takes all configured interfaces on a channel administratively out of service.

Deletes all configured interfaces that are not in service. To delete interfaces, you must first take them administratively out of service.

Opens the appropriate channel configuration window for the selected channel.

Context-Sensitive Help

If you right-click on a field in a port or channel configuration window, a description of that field appears (see Figure 5-3).

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

5-2

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Accessing Port and Channel Configuration Options

Figure 5-3. Sample of Context-Sensitive Help (Displayed on a Port and Channel

Configuration Window)

Accessing Port and Channel Configuration Options

You must first configure the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module before you can set up connection provisioning.

Perform the steps in the following procedure to access the port and channel configuration functions in the AQueView EMS.

Begin

1 Log in to the AQueView system as a user with Administrator or Configurator access privileges.

2 From the Device List or the Open Device window (press Ctrl+D or

Ctrl+O), open the PSAX device that contains the module on which you want to configure a port or channel.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

5-3

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Module

End

The PSAX device that you opened appears in the Front Panel, and its components are also displayed in the Device Tree (see Figure 5-4).

Figure 5-4. Device Tree and Device Window (Displaying a Typical Setup)

Configuring the Module

Configuring the Ports

Perform the steps in the following procedure to configure ports for the

12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservicemodule.

Begin

1 Do one of the following to open the Port and Channel Configuration window:

• In the Front Panel, double-click the port to be viewed or configured.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

5-4

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Module

• In the Front Panel, right-click the port and a menu appears. Select

Configure.

• In the Device Tree, double-click the desired port symbol or identifier.

• In the Device Tree, select a port, then right-click the icon for the module within Device Tree and a menu appears. Select Configure.

The Medium-Density DS1 Port Configuration window appears (see

Figure 5-6).

2 To configure a port, select a port entry, or double-click the right mouse button and a menu appears (see Figure 5-7).

The Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration window appears (see Figure 5-8).

3 Enter values for the fields in this window according to the information provided in Table 5-2.

4 Click Apply .

End

Figure 5-5. Front Panel View of the Medium-Density DS1 Module

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

5-5

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Module

Figure 5-6. Medium-Density DS1 Port Configuration Window

Figure 5-7. Medium-Density DS1 Port Configuration Window (Menu Displayed)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

5-6

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Module

Figure 5-8. Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window

The Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration window has two sections:

~ The Port Configuration page allows you to do the following:

• Select port settings

• View port statistics, which display line errors and coding violations

• View line status

~ The Channel Configuration page allows you to do the following:

• Select an interface

• Open the Interface Configuration window to configure the interface

• Select multiple channels, DS0 strapping, and interfaces

Note: All interfaces must be out of service before changes can be made to the port settings; otherwise, the Apply button will appear to be ghosted.

The buttons in this window have the following functions:

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

5-7

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Module

Close

Apply

Reset

Copy

Update

Clear

Button

Poll- or Poll+

Function

Closes this window.

Applies the configuration field value you set.

Resets the fields to the last set of applied values.

Copies this configuration to a range of ports.

Updates the information in the fields.

Removes the values in the Port

Statistics panel and resets them to 0.

Poll+ initiates the continuous update of statistics. Poll- suspends polling.

Table 5-2. Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window

Field Name

Line Type

[Line Coding]

(display only)

Esf

Ami

Field Values

Default: Esf

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Default: B8ZS

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

B8ZS

Description

Indicates the framing mode to be used on this port.

Extended Super Frame DS1 format.

D4 format. Channels are assigned sequentially.

Indicates the type of line coding to be used on this port. (The data format that lets either end of the communications channel correctly interpret messages from the other.)

Bipolar with 8 zero substitution. Use of a specified pattern of normal bits and bipolar violations to replace sequence of 8 zero bits.

Alternate mark inversion. Indicates zero code suppression.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

5-8

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Module

Table 5-2. Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window

Field Name

Loopback

Field Values

Default: NoLoop

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

NoLoop

LocalLoop

Description

Indicates whether the port is to be used for loopback testing and, if so, the type of loopback to be performed.

Transmit Clock

LineLoop

PayloadLoop

Default: ing

LocalTim-

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

LocalTiming

The port will not be used for loopback.

Local loopback will be used on this port. The signal will be received from another module in the chassis, sent through the module circuitry

(including the segmentation and reassembly

(SAR) function) and the chassis backplane to the originating module.

Line loop will be used on this port. The received signal will be sent through the receiver and the line driver, and then back out to the originating point.

The received signal is sent through the framing chip on the module, but not on the SAR circuitry, and then back out to the originating point. The data link is regenerated.

Indicates the timing source to be used on this port. The timing source is a signal that provides a timing reference for a transmission link.

LoopTiming

Adaptive Timing

Local clock source will be used as the timing source.

Recovered receive clock is used as the timing source.

Monitors the port buffers to increase or decrease the transmission rate. Displays when the port is configured as Unstructured in the Data Transfer

Type field.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

5-9

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Module

Table 5-2. Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window

Field Name

Line Build Out

Field Values

Default: UpTo133

Feet

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

UpTo133Feet

Description

Indicates the selectable output attenuation.

Data Transfer Type

UpTo266Feet

UpTo399Feet

UpTo533Feet

UpTo655Feet negative7-5Db negative15Db negative22-5Db

Default: Structured

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Structured

Indicates the DS1 signal is designed to be valid from 0 to 133 f eet

Indicates the DS1 signal is designed to be valid from 134 to 266 feet

Indicates the DS1 signal is designed to be valid from 267 to 399 feet

Indicates the DS1 signal is designed to be valid from 400 to 533 feet

Indicates the DS1 signal is designed to be valid from 534 to 655 feet

Indicates the T1 signal level range at which the

DS1 is configured is negative 7.5 dB

Indicates the T1 signal level range at which the

DS1 is configured is negative 15 dB

Indicates the T1 signal level range at which the

DS1 is configured is negative 22.5 dB

Indicates whether this port has structured or unstructured interfaces.

Unstructured

Indicates that this port has structured unchannelized and channelized interfaces.

Indicates that this port has unstructured (and unchannelized) interfaces.

Note: When you select this value, the Line Type,

Channelization, UpStrmIntrworking, and T1 Signaling fields are not displayed.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

5-10

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Module

Table 5-2. Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window

Field Name

Channelization

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Disabled

Enabled

Interworking Type Default: TrunkCond

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

T1 Signaling

TrunkCond

Unframed1s

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Disabled

Enabled

Description

Indicates whether the DS1 port is divided into 24 channels.

Note: When you select the value Unstructured in the Data Transfer Type field, the Channelization field is not displayed.

Indicates that the division of the DS1 port into 24 channels is enabled. Use this setting if you want to set up more than one channel for the port.

Displays the communications mode selected between the CE and ATM sides of a connection on this port during alarm conditions.

Note: When you select the value Unstructured in the Data Transfer Type field, the Interworking

Type field is display only, showing the value

Unframed1s .

Indicates that trunk conditioning will be done for each channel of this port whose corresponding

ATM side is alarmed. This improves the communication of the trunk status for TDM traffic. See the PacketStar PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway

Trunk Conditioning Application Note for more details.

Indicates that a sequence of Unframed All 1s will be transmitted to the CES end point whenever there is an alarm on the ATM side for any CE to

ATM connection on this port.

Displays the status of T1 signaling.

Note: When you select the value Unstructured in the Data Transfer Type field, the T1 Signaling field is display only, showing the value Disabled .

Indicates that T1 signaling is disabled.

Indicates that T1 signaling is enabled.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

5-11

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Module

Table 5-2. Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window

Field Name

SG Feature

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Disabled

Description

Displays the status of the connection gateway feature.

Line Status

(display only)

Channel Number

Interface Type

Admin Status

(display only)

Enabled

Default:

IispUser

NoAlarm

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Range: 1–24

AtmUni3_0

AtmUni3_1

AtmUni4_0

IispNetwork

CasTrunkLine

CircuitEmulation

FrameRelayUni

FrameRelayNni

Gr303

Pri_Isdn_Network

Pri_Isdn_User

HldcPassThrough

AtmPnni1-0

Unconfigured

Indicates that the connection gateway feature is disabled. See the PacketStar

Connection Gateway

API Specification for more details.

Indicates that the connection gateway feature is enabled.

Indicates the status of the line: NoAlarm ,

LossOfSignal , or one of several alarms. See the bit map tables for the DS1 modules in the ”SNMP

Trap Messages” appendix in the appropriate PacketStar PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway user guide, Release 6.0.0 or higher.

The channel configured with the selected port.

Note: This field is displayed on the Channel Configuration page.

When the interface for the port is configured with one of the eight interface types, the interface type (shown in the preceding column) displays in this field. An asterisk beside the interface type indicates that the interface is not in service.

Note: The value AtmPnni1_0 is available only when the Channelization field is Disabled .

Note: This field is displayed on the Channel Configuration page.

Indicates that this interface has not been configured.

Note: This field is displayed on the Channel Configuration page.

InService

OutOfService

Indicates that the no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational

Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from being configured with an interface

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

5-12

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Module

Table 5-2. Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port and Channel Configuration Window

Field Name

Oper Status

(display only)

DS0 List

Field Values

Unconfigured

InService

OutOfService

Range: 1–24

Description

This port is not operational because the interface is not configured.

Note: This field is displayed on the Channel Configuration page.

This port is capable of receiving and sending signals.

This port is not capable of receiving and sending signals.

A list of DS0s that are strapped to a selected port and channel.

Note: This field is displayed on the Channel Configuration page.

Viewing Port Statistics

Begin

You can view statistics for this port on the Port Statistics panel of the

Medium-Density Port and Channel Configuration window (see Figure 5-8 on page 5-7).

Descriptions of the data fields for the Medium-Density DS1 Port Statistics window are given in Table 5-3.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

5-13

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Module

Table 5-3. Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port Statistics Panel

Field Names

Errored Seconds

(display only)

Severely Errored

Seconds

(display only)

Severely Errored

Framing Seconds

(display only)

Unavailable Seconds

(display only)

Values

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Description

An errored second with at least one of the following:

Path Code Violations

Controlled Slip events

A detected AIS defect

Presence of Bipolar Violations.

An errored second with at least one of the following:

320 or more Path Code Violation Error events

Out of Frame defects

A detected AIS defect

A count of one-second intervals with Framing error events, an OOF defect, or a minimum of

1544 LCVs.

A second with one or more Out of Frame defects or an AIS defect.

A period of unavailable time begins when the bit error rate (BER) in each second is worse than 10 exp -3 for a period of 10 consective seconds.

These 10 seconds are considered to be unavailable time.

A one second intercal containing one or more controlled slips.

Controlled Slip Seconds

(display only)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Path Coding Violations

(display only)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

(seconds)

A frame synchronization bit error in the D4 and

DS1-noCRC formats, or a CRC error in the ESF and the DS1-CRC formats.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

5-14

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Module

Table 5-3. Field Descriptions for the Medium-Density DS1 Port Statistics Panel

Field Names

Line Errored

Seconds

(display only)

Bursty Errored

Seconds

(display only)

Line Coding

Violations

(display only)

Values

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: seconds

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: seconds

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: seconds

Description

A second in which one or more Line Code Violation error events were detected.

A second with fewer than 320 and more than 1

Path Coding Violation error events, no Severely

Errored Frame Defects and no detected incoming

AIS defects. Controlled slips are not included in this parameter. This is not incremented during an

Unavailable Second.

A Bipolar Violation or Excessive Zeroes Error

Event has occurred.

Configuring Channels

The Channel Configuration page allows you to do the following:

• Select and apply an interface

• Select DS0s and apply strapping

• Open the Interface Configuration window to configure the interface

Perform the steps in the following procedure to apply an interface to a channel for the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice.

Applying an Interface to a Channel

Begin

1 Click the Channel Configuration tab.

The Channel Configuration window appears (see Figure 5-9).

Note: All interfaces must be out of service before changes can be made to the port settings or the Apply button will appear to be ghosted.

2 Select the channels to be configured as described in Table 5-4:

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

5-15

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Module

Table 5-4. Selecting Channels for Configuration

If you want to select...

a single channel more than one consecutive channel in a list

Note: You can only do this if you selected Enabled in the

Channelization field on the

Port Configuration page.

then do this...

click the channel in the list. a. Press the Shift key.

b. Click the left mouse button to select the first and final channels in the list.

c. Release the Shift key.

more than one consecutive channel in a list

Note: You can only do this if you selected Enabled in the

Channelization field on the

Port Configuration page.

several channels that are not consecutive in a list

Note: You can only do this if you selected Enabled in the

Channelization field on the

Port Configuration page.

All channels in this range become selected.

press the left mouse button and drag it over the consecutive channels.

a. Press the Ctrl key.

b. Click the left mouse button to select each of the channels in the list as desired.

c. Release the Ctrl key.

All channels that you clicked become selected.

3 In the Channel Configuration page (see Figure 5-9), either click the arrow in the Interface Type field (in the middle of the window), or double-click the channel in the Interface Type field, and select an interface from the list.

Note: You can double-click in the channel in the Interface Type field to select a new interface only when an interface is not currently selected for that channel. If an interface is applied for a channel and you double-click on it in the Interface Type field, the Interface

Configuration window appears.

4 Click Apply to Selected .

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

5-16

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Module

Figure 5-9. Medium-Density DS1 Channel Configuration Page

The buttons in this window have the following functions:

Apply to Selected

Close

Button Function

Applies the configuration field value you set.

Closes this window.

Strapping DS0s

After applying an interface to a channel, perform the steps in the following procedure to strap DS0s on the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice.

Begin

1 In the Channel n panel, click the checkboxes to strap the DS0s as desired.

Note: You cannot select DS0s, nor apply strapping to DS0s, on an unchannelized port.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

5-17

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Provisioning Connections

2 Click Apply To Selected > Close .

End

Configuring

Interfaces

For a list of valid interface types for the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservicemodule, instructions on configuring interfaces, and instructions on changing an interface configuration, see Chapter 6.

Provisioning Connections

To provision connections for this module, refer to the PacketStar PSAX System

Connections Provisioning Guide , which is provided on the PacketStar PSAX Product Information Library CD-ROM.

Copying a Port Configuration

The Copy button on the Port and Channel Configuration window of each

I/O module allows you to copy a port configuration to a range of ports, either from a given module, or for a range of modules

To copy a port configuration to a range of ports, perform the steps in the following procedure from the appropriate Port and Channel Configuration window. This procedure is optional.

Begin

1 On the Port Configuration page, click Copy .

The Copy Port Configuration window appears with the slot and port of the module you selected in the Start At and Stop At panels (see

Figure 5-10).

2 Select the range of slots and ports to which you wish the port configuration to be copied as follows (refer to Figure 5-11):

In the Start At panel, choose the slot and port where the copying should begin. In the Stop At panel, choose the slot and port where the copying should end.

3 To copy the associated interface configuration for this port, click the box beside Copy interface configuration.

1 If you are copying a port configuration from an I/O module with only one port, you must select different slot numbers in the Start At and Stop At panels.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

5-18

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Copying a Port Configuration

Note: Step 3 not applicable unless you have configured at least one channel of the port you are copying (see step 2) with an interface type.

You may also choose to copy an interface configuration to range of slots from the appropriate Interface Configuration window.

4 To overwrite the existing interface configuration of the destination ports, click the box beside Overwrite configured interfaces.

Note: “Overwrite” means that the existing interface will be deleted and a new interface will be created in its place. This option is only available if Copy interface configuration is selected. The Overwrite configured interfaces option is disabled until you click the box beside

Copy interface configuration. The Disable traps during copy option is enabled by default. To overwrite the port specified in the Stop At column, it must be out of service.

5 Click Copy .

The port configuration is copied to the range of ports you selected.

End

Figure 5-10. Sample Copy Port Configuration Window (After Initially Selecting the Copy Button From a Port Configuration Page)

Figure 5-11. Sample Copy Port Configuration Window (After Selecting a Valid

Attributes)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

5-19

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Obtaining Module Hardware Information

The buttons in this window have the following functions:

Table 5-5.

Button

Close

Copy

Abort

Function

Closes this window.

Copies this interface to a range of channels.

Cancels the copying process after it is initiated.

Obtaining Module Hardware Information

This section describes how to obtain product, model, version, and serial number data about a module, either directly from the Front Panel tab or from the

Device Tree (see Figure 5-12).

Figure 5-12. Sample Device Tree

Data about the hardware for a specific I/O or server module on a PSAX device can be obtained from the Module Information window. Perform the steps in the following procedure to obtain data about the hardware for a specific I/O or server module.

Begin

1 Double-click the bar code image on the Front Panel (see Figure 5-13), or click the name of the module in the Device Tree.

2 A menu appears. Select Module Information.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

5-20

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Obtaining Module Hardware Information

Click the bar code to open the Module

Information window

FAIL

ACTIVE

UNSTR

DS3/E3

CES

Figure 5-13. Obtaining Hardware Data from a Module

The coresponding Module Information window appears (see

Figure 5-14).

Figure 5-14. Sample Module Information Window

On the Module Information window, you can view serial numbers, hardware versions, and additional inventory data about the modules.

The fields on this window are described in the following table.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

5-21

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Obtaining Module Hardware Information

Table 5-6. Field Descriptions for the Module Information Window

Field Name Field Values

Module Type Default: N/A

Range: from PSAX system database

Format: Predefined alphanumeric alphanumeric

Operational Status Default: Unknown

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Unknown

Description

Indicates the name of the module in the slot. All modules supported by the PSAX systems and the

AQueView system are listed in the section "I/O and Server Modules" in this chapter.

Displays the operational mode of the module.

Alarm Status

Primary

Standby

Default: No Alarm

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Indicates that the module has not been configured.

For an I/O or server module, indicates that at least one port or channel on the module has been configured.

For a CPU module, indicates that this module is the primary CPU module.

Indicates that the module, in redundant systems, is operating as the backup module to the primary module.

Indicates for the CPU module, in redundant systems, that this module is the backup CPU module.

Displays the present alarm condition of the module. For the alarm status conditions, see the table

“Alarm Status Descriptions” following these field descriptions.For the alarm status conditions, see

“Obtaining Hardware Operating Status Data for

Modules” in this chapter.

Software Version Default: N/A

Range: (from module firmware)

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Displays the version of PSAX system software with which the modules’ firmware was released.

CPU system software that is currently running on the PSAX system. See the most recent Release Note document for the latest software and firmware lineup information.

Hardware Revision Default: N/A

Range: (from module firmware)

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Displays the version of the hardware for the selected module.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

5-22

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Obtaining Module Status Information

Table 5-6. Field Descriptions for the Module Information Window (Continued)

Field Name

Product Element

Code

Serial Number

Operating Mode

Field Values Description

Default: N/A

Range: (from module firmware)

Format: Predefined

Displays the product element code (PEC) used to identify and order this type of module. The PEC is encoded in the module firmware.

Default: N/A

Range: (from module firmware)

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Displays the unique serial number of the individual module. The product serial number is encoded in the module firmware. The format of this field is the following:

PSAX System Rel. 6.5.0 and later: 12-digit number in the format: YYVVDDnnnnnn , where

YY = year of manufacture

VV = vendor ID code (manufacturer and location)

For existing products with the 10-digit serial number used in Rel. 6.5.0 or later systems, this number is displayed with two preceding zeros.

PSAX Rel. 6.3.0 and earlier: 10-digit number. For products with 12-digit serial numbers used in

Rel. 6.3.0 or earlier systems, the first two digits

( YY ) are not displayed.

Default: N/A

Range: (module- dependent)

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Displays the module type for those modules that can be switched between two module types, for example, DS3 and E3. This field is displayed only for modules that support a switchable module type.

Obtaining Module Status Information

This section describes how to obtain hardware operating status data about a module. You can quickly obtain status information about ports, interfaces, and connection on the PSAX devices using the AQueView EMS. All of this information can be obtained from the Front Panel tab or the Device Tree.

Obtaining Hardware Operating Status Data

Data about the operating status of a module can be obtained from the Device

Tree or from the Front Panel tab. The operating status of a module is reflected in the various colors displayed on the LED status indicators, the ports on the module in the Front Panel tab, and the modules and PSAX sys-

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

5-23

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Obtaining Module Status Information tems listed in the Device Tree. Alarms that display in the Front Panel tab and

Device Tree clear automatically when the condition that created them is corrected.

Obtaining LED Status Indicator Data

The LED status indicators on the Front Panel tab (see Figure 5-15) directly reflect the status lights on the modules in the actual PSAX device. The color of the LEDs represent the current operational and alarm status values for that module, as described in Table 5-7.

FAIL

ACTIVE

UNSTR

DS3/E3

CES

LED

Status

Indicators

Figure 5-15. Obtaining LED Status Indicator Data

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

5-24

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Obtaining Module Status Information

Table 5-7. LED Status Indicator Descriptions

Indicator

LED Name on

Faceplate

Description

Module Status

Indicators

FAIL A red light at the top of a module indicates the complete failure of a module.

Possible causes include the following:

• Module was removed from chassis

• Module is improperly seated into the chassis

• Module is malfunctioning

• Module is not configured properly

ACTIVE A green light on the module indicates that the module is functioning properly.

Note: If both lights are displayed as gray in the Front Panel, the module is functioning properly but no ports, channels, or interfaces have been configured.

Line Signal

Indicator

CPU Indicator

LOS

Timing Indicators CLK LOS

A yellow light indicates a loss of signal on that port.

A yellow light on an active Stratum 3–4 module indicates a loss of the clock timing signal. If neither the FAIL nor the ACTIVE light is on, then the module is the backup Stratum 3–4 module .

If neither the FAIL nor the ACTIVE light is on, the module is the backup

CPU.

Power Supply

(non-redundant)

The Power Supply module contains an additional yellow LED. This light is off when a second power supply module is installed in the system and is drawing less than 50 percent of its power capacity.

Obtaining Port Configuration Data

The color of the ports on the Front Panel tab and of the modules in the

Device Tree directly reflect whether the port is configured and if it is in or out of service. The current operational status of a PSAX device or any of the modules in the device also can be determined by looking at the color of the name of the PSAX device or module in the Device Tree. To obtain port status information about a specific module in a PSAX device, do one of the following:

• View the ports on the module in the Front Panel tab (see Figure 5-16)

• View at the status indicators in the Device Tree (see Figure 5-17)

Use the information in Table 5-8 to evaluate the color of a module’s ports.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

5-25

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Obtaining Module Status Information

FAIL

ACTIVE

UNSTR

DS3/E3

CES

A port changes color to indicate it's status.

Figure 5-16. Port Status Data

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

5-26

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Obtaining Module Status Information

Module Indicator and Module Name

Name of PSAX Device

Operational Status

Port

Indicators

Figure 5-17. Device Tree Status Indicators

Table 5-8. Port Status Data

Color

Dark Blue

Light Blue

Green

Red

Yellow

The port is unconfigured; no interface is applied to the port.

Description

The port is configured and out-of-service; an interface is applied to the port but it is neither administratively nor operationally in service.

The port is configured, operational, and in service.

The port is configured and administratively in service, but it is operationally out of service. (Something other than an operator command has caused the port or interface to go out of service.)

The port is configured; a transmit clock loss of signal

(LOS) alarm was received.

Ghosted Modules

If a configured I/O or server module has failed or is removed from the PSAX chassis, a “ghosted” or light gray version of the module appears in the Front

Panel tab.

To correct this condition, you must do one of the following as described in

Table 5-9.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

5-27

Chapter 5 Configuring Ports and Channels Using the AQueView

EMS

Saving the Configuration

Table 5-9. Removing Ghosted Modules from the Front Panel

If a module...

has failed has been removed in error is being replaced with a dissimilar module and you want to...

• retain all configurations on this module

• restore service remove the ghosted module from the Front Panel then do this ...

remove the failed module and insert an identical module.

reinsert the original module into the chassis.

delete all interfaces to unconfigure the module (afterward you may insert and configure another module).

Saving the Configuration

CAUTION:

Select Device > Save PSAX Configuration to permanently save the configuration.

Applied, but unsaved, configuration data will not be lost if the PSAX system is restarted, or if power to the PSAX system is lost. Terminating the AQueView

EMS will not cause the applied values to be lost because the configuration data is stored in the PSAX device, not in the AQueView EMS.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

5-28

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Configuring the Interfaces Using the

AQueView

®

EMS

Overview of This Chapter

This chapter provides instructions for configuring the following interface types for the 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice module:

• ATM interswitch signaling protocol (IISP) user

• ATM interswitch signaling protocol (IISP) network

• ATM private network-network interface (PNNI) 1.0

• ATM user-network interface (UNI) 3.0, 3.1, and 4.0

• CAS Trunkline

• Circuit emulation

• GR-303

• Frame relay user-network interface (UNI)

• Frame relay network-network interface (NNI)

• High-level data link (HDLC) passthrough

• Primary rate interface (PRI) Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) network

• Primary rate interface (PRI) Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) user

Before You Begin

Note: For a matrix of interface types by PSAX I/O module types, see the

Interface Types by I/O Module Types table in the appendix, “Reference Information.”

Configuring the ATM IISP Interface

This section provides instructions for configuring an I/O module for the

Interim Interswitch Signaling Protocol (IISP) user and network interfaces.

IISP, (formerly known as PNNI, Phase 0), was introduced as an interim standard, pending completion of PNNI, Phase 1. Building on ATM UNI 3.0 and

3.1, it uses static routing tables established by the network administrator to route connections around link failures.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-1

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM IISP Interface

Accessing or Viewing the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window

After applying the IispUser or IispNetwork interface type to a channel from the Channel Configuration page, do one of the following to access the

IISP Interface Configuration window:

~ Double-click the left mouse button on the channel for which you want to configure the interface.

~ Click the right mouse button on the channel for which you want to configure the interface and a menu appears. Select Configure in the menu.

The IISP Interface Configuration window (see Figure 6-1) appears.

Figure 6-1. ATM IISP Configuration Window

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-2

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM IISP Interface

The buttons in this window have the following functions:

Button Function

Retrieve from NSAP database If you have previously established an NSAP address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Local

NSAP Address (Hex) field.

Calculate Navis NSAP Address Displays when you configure user properties to include the Navis NSAP format. For more information, see the appropriate Navis

AQueView Element Management System User

Guide . Automatically calculates the local

NSAP address, and populates the NSAP address in the NSAP Address (Hex) field using the Navis algorithm for the slot, port, and channel selected in the fields on the bottom right panel.

Bring Into Service

Take Out of Service

Displays when the Administrative Status field is OutOfService ). Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value InService displays in the Administrative Status field.

You must first configure the interface before you can use this command.

Displays when the Administrative Status field is InService . Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. The value

OutOfService displays in the Administrative

Status field.

You must use this command first before using the Delete command.

Delete

Copy

Close

Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring.

You must first take interface out of service (by clicking the Take Out of Service button) before you can use this button.

Copies this interface to a range of slots, ports, and channels.

Closes this window.

Setting the Values for the ATM IISP Interface

To set values for the ATM IISP interface, perform the steps in the following procedure.

1 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in

Table 6-1.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-3

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM IISP Interface

2 To configure the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field, perform the steps in the section, “Adding NSAP Addresses,” in this chapter, and then return to this procedure.

3 To apply the interface configuration values, including the NSAP address configuration, click Apply .

Note: The interface must have in-service status so that the PVCs and

SVCs you will set up to use this interface will work.

End

Table 6-1. Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

Operational Status

(display only)

Field Values

Default:

Unconfigured

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Description

Indicates whether the interface can pass traffic or not. The administrative status field below must be

InService before the interface can pass traffic.

Unconfigured

InService

OutOfService

The interface is unconfigured.

The interface is operational.

The interface is not operational because some condition is preventing the port from being fully operational, such as a loss of signal to the port.

Indicates the administrative status of the interface.

Administrative Status

(display only)

Default:

Unconfigured

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Unconfigured

InService

The interface is unconfigured.

The interface is in service.

OutOfService

Minimum SVC VPI Default: 0

Range: 0–255

Format: Numeric

Maximum SVC VPI Default: 0

Range: 0–255

Format: Numeric

The interface is not in service.

Over Subscription Default: 10

Range: 1–100

Format: Numeric

Allows for the allocated reserved bandwidth for the line to be over-utilized by up to a factor of

100. Generally, a value between 1 and 4 will normally not cause problems, although higher levels are often acceptable.

Note: For the maximum and minimum VPI/VCI values below, always enter or change the maximum value before the minimum value.

Indicates the minimum VPI value in which signaling can occur on this interface.

Any data you enter in this field is relevant only if you set the ATM Signaling field to Enabled .

The maximum VPI in which signaling can occur on this interface.

Any data you enter in this field is relevant only if you set the ATM Signaling field to Enabled .

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-4

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM IISP Interface

Table 6-1. Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window

Field Name Field Values

Minimum SVC VCI Default: 32

Range: 32–65535

Format: Numeric

Maximum SVC VCI Default:

ATM Signaling

UPC Support

255

Range: 32–65535

Format: Numeric

Default:

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Default:

Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Description

The minimum VCI in which signaling can occur on this interface.

Any data you enter in this field is relevant only if you set the ATM Signaling field to Enabled .

The maximum VCI in which signaling can occur on this interface.

Any data you enter in this field is relevant only if you set the ATM Signaling field to Enabled .

Indicates whether the ATM Signaling path is enabled or disabled on the preceding Min SVC

VPI and Max SVC VPI fields. SVCs use ATM signaling to set up and tear down dynamic connections on this interface.

SVCs cannot be created on this interface. All VPIs and VCI ranges are used for PVCs, not SVCs.

SVCs can be created on this interface.

PVCs can be created only outside the maximum and minimum VPI and VCI ranges listed above in the Min SVC VPI, Max SVC VPI, Min SVC VCI, and Max SVC VCI fields.

Indicates whether usage parameter control is to be used on all VCs on this interface. UPC determines if traffic control is performing to negotiated

PCR, SCR, or MBS.

Disables UPC support.

If UPC Support is disabled, traffic policing cannot be supported on any VC on this interface.

Enables UPC support, providing traffic control support on this interface. This feature is supported on these modules only:

• 1-Port OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM

• 1-Port OC-3c 1+1 APS SM/MM

• 1-Port STM-1 1+1 MSP SM/MM

• 21-Port High Density E1 Multiservice

• 12-Port Medium Density DS1 Multiservice

The feature is supported on these channelized

DS3 modules only (when channelizing to DS0s):

• 1-Port Channelized DS3 Multiservice

• 1-Port DS3 IMA

• Quadserial

Note: Enabling both UPC support and traffic shaping at the same time on this interface is an incompatible configuration and will be rejected.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-5

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM IISP Interface

Table 6-1. Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

UBR Load Balancing

Ingress Avail BW

(cps)

(display only)

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Default: 0

Range: Module dependent

Format: cps

Description

Note: Virtual interfaces do not support UBR Load

Balancing.

Disables UBR Load Balancing on the connections on this interface.

Enables UBR Load Balancing on the connections on this interface. Selecting this value includes

UBR in the cps counts of the [Egress Avail BW] field.

Displays the total ingress bandwidth available for connections for this interface. The value 0 is changed to the cps count available for the interface after clicking Apply . The ingress available bandwidth depends on the configured module parameters, such as port strapping, type of cell mapping, configured port speed, and other factors. As each new connection is added, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field may decrease. Bandwidth for UBR connections is not included, unless the UBR Load

Balancing field on this interface is Enabled . You will see values in the [Ingress Avail BW] field only for connections that are in service.

• Any non-CES OC3 and STM-1 APS module will show the value 353207

• Any OC-12 module will show the value

1412830

The values for other types of I/O modules that use this field vary depending on the following parameters :

• IMA - number of ports configured

• DS1/E1/STS-1e - number of channels strapped

• DS3/E3 - Cell Mapping ( Plcp or DirectMapping )

• Serial - port bandwidth configured

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-6

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM IISP Interface

Table 6-1. Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

Egress Avail BW

(cps)

(display only)

SSCOP Rx Wnd

Size

Field Values

Default: 0

Range: Module dependent

Format: cps

Default: 32

Range: 8–32

Format: Packets

Description

Displays the total egress bandwidth available for connections for this interface. The value 0 is changed to the cps count available for the interface after clicking Apply . The egress available bandwidth depends on the configured module parameters, such as port strapping, type of cell mapping, configured port speed, and other factors. As each new connection is added, the amount of available bandwidth as indicated in this field may decrease. Bandwidth for UBR connections is not included, unless the UBR Load

Balancing field on this interface is Enabled . You will see values in the [Egress Avail BW] field only for connections that are in service.

• Any non-CES OC3 and STM-1 APS module will show the value 353207

• Any OC-12 module will show the value

1412830

The values for other types of I/O modules that use this field vary depending on the following parameters :

• IMA - number of ports configured

• DS1/E1/STS-1e - number of channels strapped

• DS3/E3 - Cell Mapping ( Plcp or DirectMapping )

• Serial - port bandwidth configured

On the receiving side, values must be equal to or greater than the values for the transmit side for fastest transmission rates. This prescription is suggested for connecting to a Multiservice Media

Gateway from a remote site only. The Multiservice Media Gateway configures these settings internally in its own ATM switch.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-7

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM IISP Interface

Table 6-1. Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

Traffic Shaping

Local NSAP Address

(Hex)

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Hexadecimal

Description

• 1-Port STM-1 MM/SM with AQueMan

• 1-Port STM-1 MM/SM with Traffic Shaping

• 1-Port OC-3c MM/SM with AQueMan

• 1-Port OC-3c MM/SM with Traffic Shaping

• 1-Port OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM

Disables the traffic shaping feature.

Enables the traffic shaping feature.

Note: Enabling both the UPC Support and the

Traffic Shaping fields on this interface is an incompatible configuration and will be rejected.

Specifies the ATM NSAP address of the local end of the connection, in hexadecimal notation.

Enter the NSAP address of the local ATM interface.

Viewing Interface Statistics

To view interface statistics, click the Interface Statistics tab.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-8

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM IISP Interface

The Interface Statistics page appears (see Figure 6-2).

Figure 6-2. ATM IISP Interface Statistics Page

The buttons in this window have the following functions:

Button

Update

Clear

Poll

Function

Updates the information in the fields.

Removes the values in this window and resets them to 0.

Poll+ initiates the continuous update of statistics and changes the button to Poll.

Poll suspends polling and changes the button to Poll+ .

Descriptions of the ATM IISP Interface Statistics window are described in

Table 6-2.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-9

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM IISP Interface

Table 6-2. Field Descriptions for the ATM IISP Interface Statistics Page

Field Name

Mismatched Cells

Received

(display only)

Valid Cells Sent

(display only)

Null Cells Sent

(display only)

Time Elapsed

(display only)

Field Values

Valid Cells Received

(display only)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Errored Cells

Received

(display only)

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Default: 00:00:00

Range: N/A

Format: numeric

Description

Number of valid cells received into interface side

A during the amount of time shown in Time

Elapsed field.

Number of errored cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time

Elapsed field.

Number of mismatched cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in

Time Elapsed field.

Number of valid cells transmitted out of inter-face side B during the amount of time shown in Time

Elapsed field.

Number of null cells transmitted out of inter-face side B during the amount of time shown inTime

Elapsed field.

Time elapsed since last reset.

Viewing Interface Utilization Information

Perform the steps in the following procedure to view interface utilization information.

Begin

1 Click the Utilization tab.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-10

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM IISP Interface

The Utilization page appears (see Figure 6-3).

Figure 6-3.

ATM IISP Utilization Page

The buttons at the bottom of the window have the following functions:

Button

60 sec

Function

Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device.

Select a time interval from the pull-down menu:

5 sec

10 sec

20 sec

30 sec

60 sec (default)

90 sec

2 min

3 min

4 min

5 min

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-11

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Button

Clear

Poll

Function

Removes the data in the Average Bits/Sec and Average

Throughput panels.

Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll.

Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to

Poll+ .

Average Throughput/Utilization measurements for ATM interfaces may be enabled or disabled per interface (the default value is Disabled ).

2 Select the time interval in the 60 sec field.

3 Click Poll+ and the polling begins.

The following interface measurements are calculated and displayed:

~ Average number of cells per second

~ Average number of bits per second

~ Average interface utilization, displayed as a percentage of the interface speed

4 Click Poll and the polling terminates.

End

For more information on the Utilization page, see the section, “Utilization

Calculations,” in this chapter.

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Accessing or Viewing the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

This section provides instructions for configuring an I/O module for the ATM private network-network interface (PNNI)1.0. The following I/O modules have ATM PNNI 1.0 interface capability:

Before you can select the value as the interface type, you must first configure the PNNI node (see Chapter 6 in the appropriate Navis ™ AQueView

Element

Management System User Guide ).

After applying the AtmPnni1_0 interface type to a channel from the Channel Configuration page, do one of the following to access the ATM PNNI

Interface Configuration window:

~ Double-click the left mouse button on the channel for which you want to configure the interface.

~ Click the right mouse button on the channel for which you want to configure the interface and a menu appears. Select Configure in the menu.

The ATM PNNI Interface Configuration window appears (see Figure 6-4).

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-12

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Figure 6-4. ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Configuration Window

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-13

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

The buttons in this window have the following functions:

Button Function

Retrieve from NSAP database If you have previously established an NSAP address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Local

NSAP Address (Hex) field.

Calculate Navis NSAP Address Displays when you configure user properties to include the Navis NSAP format. For more information, see the appropriate Navis

AQueView Element Management System User

Guide . Automatically calculates the local

NSAP address, and populates the NSAP address in the NSAP Address (Hex) field using the Navis algorithm for the slot, port, and channel selected in the fields on the bottom right panel.

Bring Into Service

Take Out of Service

Displays when the Administrative Status field is OutOfService ). Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value InService displays in the Administrative Status field.

You must first configure the interface before you can use this command.

Displays when the Administrative Status field is InService . Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. The value

OutOfService displays in the Administrative

Status field.

You must use this command first before using the Delete command.

Delete

Copy

Close

Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring.

You must first take interface out of service (by clicking the Take Out of Service button) before you can use this button.

Copies this interface to a range of slots, ports, and channels.

Closes this window.

PNNI Interface Values To set the values for the ATM PNNI interface, perform the steps in the following procedure.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-14

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Begin

1 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in

Table 6-3.

2 To configure the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field, perform the steps in the section, “Adding NSAP Addresses,” in this chapter, and then return to this procedure.

3 To apply the interface configuration values, including the NSAP address configuration, click Apply .

4 To activate the interface after you have applied the configuration values, click Bring Into Service .

5 Continue to step 2 of the section, “Performing Bulk Operations,” in this chapter.

Note: The interface must have in-service status so that the PVCs and

SVCs you will set up to use this interface will work.

End

Table 6-3. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

Node Index

Field Values

Default: 0

Range: 0–65535

Format: Numeric

Description

Note: For the maximum and minimum VPI/VCI values below, always enter or change the maximum value before the minimum value.

Minimum SVC VPI Default: 0

Range: 1–255 (for low-speed modules);

1–4095 (for highspeed modules). See

Note at right

Format: Numeric

Specifies the lower boundary of the VPI for SVC connections.

Note: As the PNNI signaling field is enabled by default on this interface, VPI 0 is not available.

Maximum SVC VPI Default: 0

Range: 1–255 (for low-speed modules);

1–4095 (for highspeed modules). See

Note at right.

Format: Numeric

Specifies the upper boundary of the VPI for SVC connections.

Note: As the PNNI signaling field is enabled by default on this interface, VPI 0 is not available.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-15

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Table 6-3. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name Field Values

Minimum SVC VCI Default: 32/65535

Range: 32–65535

Format: Numeric

Maximum SVC VCI Default: 65535

Range: 32–65535

Format: Numeric

Remote SVC VPI

(display only)

Default: 0

Range: 0–4095

Format: Numeric

Remote SVC VPI

(display only)

Remote SVC VCI

(display only)

Default: 0

Range: 0–4095

Format: Numeric

Default: 32/65535

Range: 32–65535

Format: numeric

Remote SVC VCI

(display only)

Default: 65535

Range: 32–65535

Format: Numeric

Over Subscription Default: 10

Range: 1–100

Format: Numeric

Description

Specifies the lower boundary of the VCI for SVC connections.

Specifies the upper boundary of the VCI for SVC connections.

Displays the lower boundary of the VPI for SVC connections for the remote side.

Displays the upper boundary of the VPI for SVC connections for the remote side.

Displays the lower boundary of the VCI for SVC connections for the remote side.

Displays the upper boundary of the VCI for SVC connections for the remote side.

Allows for the allocated reserved bandwidth for the line to be over-utilized by up to a factor of

100. Generally, a value between 1 and 4 is normally safe, although higher levels are often acceptable.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-16

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Table 6-3. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

UPC Support

UBR Load Balancing

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Character

Disabled

Enabled

Description

Indicates whether usage parameter control

(policing) is used on this interface. UPC determines if traffic control is performing to negotiated

PCR, SCR, or MBS.

This feature is supported on these modules only:

• OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM 1+1 APS/MSP

• OC-3c 1+1 APS SM/MM

• STM-1 1+1 MSP SM/MM

• High Density E1

• Medium Density DS1

The feature is supported on these channelized

DS3 modules (when channelizing to DS0s only):

• 1-Port Channelized DS3 Multiservice

• 1-Port DS3 IMA

• Quadserial

Disables UPC support on this interface.

If UPC support is disabled, traffic policing cannot be supported on any VC.

Enables UPC support on this interface, providing traffic policing support for all VCs.

Note: Do not enable the Traffic Shaping feature and the UPC Support feature for the same connection. Your configuration will be rejected.

Note: Virtual interfaces do not support UBR Load

Balancing.

Disables UBR load balancing on the connections on this interface.

Enables UBR load balancing on the connections on this interface. Selecting this value includes

UBR in the cps counts of the [Egress Avail BW] field.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-17

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Table 6-3. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

AdminWeight -

CBR

Field Values

Default: 5040

Range:

504–16777215

Format: Numeric

AdminWeight - RT

VBR

AdminWeight -

NRT VBR

Default: 5040

Range:

504–16777215

Format: Numeric

Default: 5040

Range:

504–16777215

Format: Numeric

Description

Specifies the administrative weight for the constant bit rate service category. Used by PNNI in path selection,the higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the note below this table.

Specifies the administrative weight for the real time-variable bit rate service category. Used by

PNNI in path selection, the higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the note below this table.

Specifies the administrative weight for the nonreal time-variable bit rate service category. Used by PNNI in path selection, the higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the note below this table.

Specifies the administrative weight for the unspecified bit rate service category. Used by

PNNI in path selection, the higher the weight, the lower the priority. See the note below this table.

AdminWeight -

UBR

Operational Status

(display only)

Administrative Status

(display only)

Default: 5040

Range:

504–16777215

Format: Numeric

Default:

OutOfService

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

InService

OutOfService

Default:

OutOfService

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

InService

Indicates whether the interface is capable of passing traffic or not.

Indicates that the interface is operational.

Indicates that the interface is not operational.

Indicates the configured status of the interface.

PNNI Signaling

(display only)

OutOfService

Indicates that no conditions are preventing the port from being fully operational.

Indicates that some condition is preventing the port from being configured with an interface.

Enables ATM signaling over a PNNI link that sets up and tears down SVCs.

VPI Signaling

Channel

(display only)

Default: Enabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Enabled

Disabled

Default: 0

Range: 0–4095

Format: Numeric

Enables ATM signaling over a PNNI link.

Disables ATM signaling over a PNNI link.

Displays the virtual path/Virtual channel identifier for SVC signaling.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-18

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Table 6-3. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

VPI Signaling

Channel

(display only)

Remote Min/Max

SVC VPI

(display only)

Port Id.

(display only)

Field Values

Default: 5

Range: 0–4095

Format: Numeric

Default: 0/0

Range: 0–4095

Format: Numeric

Default: 201001

Range: Chassis dependent

Format: Numeric

Description

Displays the virtual channel identifier for SVC signaling.

Indicates the minimum (lower) and maximum

(upper) boundary of the VPI for SVC connections for the remote side.

Aggregate Token

Traffic Descriptor

(display only)

VP Capability

Default:

Range:

0–2147483647

Format: cps

Default:

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Default:

True

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Displays the interface port identifier, a point of attachment of a logical link to a given logical node. This is automatically generated based on the location (slot, port, channel) of the interface.

A value of 0 indicates that no port has been specified.

This field is not currently supported.

Displays the traffic descriptor index,an entry in the atmTrafficDescrParamTable defined in RFC

1695 that specifies the traffic allocation for the

PNNI routing control channel (VCI=18) on this interface.

Indicates whether the interface is capable of having virtual path connections (VPCs) established within it.

False

The interface is capable of having VPCs established within it.

The interface cannot have VPCs established within it.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-19

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Table 6-3. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

Service Category

(display only)

Ingress Avail BW

(cps)

(display only)

Field Values

Default: NrtVbr

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

NrtVbr

Cbr

RtVbr

Abr

Ubr

Default: 0

Range:

User-configured

Format: cps

Description

Non-realtime variable bit rate service.

Constant bit rate service.

Real-time variable bit rate service.

Available bit rate service.

Unspecified bit rate service.

UBR Load Balancing field on this interface is

Enabled . You will see values in the [Ingress Avail

BW] field only for connections that are in service.

• Any non-CES OC3 and STM-1 APS module will show the value 353207

• Any OC-12 module will show the value

1412830

The values for other types of I/O modules that use this field vary depending on the following parameters :

• IMA - number of ports configured

• DS1/E1/STS-1e - number of channels strapped

• DS3/E3 - Cell Mapping ( Plcp or DirectMapping )

• Serial - port bandwidth configured

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-20

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Table 6-3. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

Egress Avail BW

(cps)

(display only)

SSCOP Rx Wnd

Size

Field Values

Default: 0

Range:

User-configured

Format: cps

Default: 32

Range: 8–32

Format: Packets

Description

UBR Load Balancing field on this interface is

Enabled . You will see values in the [Egress Avail

BW] field only for connections that are in service.

• Any non-CES OC3 and STM-1 APS module will show the value 353207

• Any OC-12 module will show the value

1412830

The values for other types of I/O modules that use this field vary depending on the following parameters :

• IMA -IMA - number of ports configured

• DS1/E1/STS-1e - number of channels strapped

• DS3/E3 - Cell Mapping ( Plcp or DirectMapping )

• Serial - port bandwidth configured

On the receiving side, values must be equal to or greater than the values for the transmit side for fastest transmission rates.

Note: These settings are suggested for connecting to a Multiservice Media Gateway from a remote site only. The Multiservice Media Gateway configures these settings internally in its own ATM switch.

For more information on this field, see the Application Note entitled Connecting a CBX or GX Switch to a PacketStar® PSAX Multiservice Media Gateway

Via an ATM Port , Issue 2, Document No. 255-700-236.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-21

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Table 6-3. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name Field Values

Local NSAP Address

(Hex)

Default: 0

Range:

Format: Hexadecimal

Description

Specifies the ATM NSAP address of the local end of the connection. Enter the NSAP address of the local ATM interface.

Note: When configuring the Admin Weight fields, you can choose a value based on the range listed in the table aboveTable 6-3. However, it is recommended that if you want to use a value greater than 5040 (the default value), you should choose a number divisible by 5040, such as 10080 , 15120 , and so on. If you want to use a value smaller than 5040 , choose a multiple of 5040, such as 2, 3, 5,

6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and so on, or their multiples. The PSAX <XXXX> system allows up to 20 administrative weight entries per PNNI route.

Viewing Interface Statistics

To view interface statistics, click the Interface Statistics tab.

The Interface Statistics page appears (see Figure 6-5).

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-22

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Figure 6-5. ATM PNNI 1.0 Interface Statistics Page

The buttons in this window have the following functions:

Button

Update

Clear

Poll

Function

Updates the information in the fields.

Removes the values in this window and resets them to 0.

Poll+ initiates the continuous update of statistics and changes the button to Poll.

Poll suspends polling and changes the button to Poll+ .

The fields on this window are described in Table 6-4.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-23

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Table 6-4. Field Descriptions for the ATM PNNI Interface Statistics Page

Field Name Field Values

Valid Cells Received Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2

-1)

Format: exponential notation

Errored Cells

Received

Default: 0000000000

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Mismatched Cells

Received

Default: 0000000000

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default:

Valid Cells Sent

Null Cells Sent

Time Elapsed

Description

Specifies the number of valid cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Specifies the number of errored cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Specifies the number of mismatched cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2

-1)

Format: exponential notation

Default: notation

0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2

-1)

Format: exponential

Specifies the number of valid cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Specifies the number of null cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time Elapsed field.

Note: This parameter is not supported in the

OC-12c/STM-4c SM/MM 1+1 APS/MSP modules.

Default: 0:00:00

Range: NA

Format: Time in hour

(x), minutes (xx), seconds (xx)

Specifies the time elapsed since the last reset in h:mm:ss (hour: minute:seconds) format.

Configuring the Integrated Link Management Interface (ILMI)

Accessing or Viewing the ILMI

Configuration Page

To display the ILMI Configuration page (see Figure 6-6), click the ILMI Configuration tab.

Setting ILMI

Configuration Values

To set values for ILMI configuration, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

1 Click the ILMI Configuration tab.

The ILMI Configuration page appears (see Figure 6-6).

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-24

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

2 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in

Table 6-5.

3 To apply the interface configuration values, click Apply .

4 To go back to the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window, click Close .

End

Figure 6-6. ILMI Configuration Page

The buttons in this window have the following functions:

Button

Registered User Address

Table

Apply

Reset

Function

Displays the Registered User Address

Table.

Applies the configuration field values you set.

Resets the fields to the last set of applied values.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-25

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Close

Update

Button Function

Closes this window.

Updates the information in the fields.

Table 6-5. Field Descriptions for the PNNI ILMI Configuration Window

Field Name

ILMI Operational

Status

(display only)

Field Values

Default:

OutOfService

Range: N/A

Format: predefined

OutOfService

Description

Indicates whether ILMI connectivity is operational or not.

ILMI Protocol

Address Registration

(display only)

InService

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Default: Disabled

Range: As noted below.

Format: predefined

Disabled

Indicates that ILMI connectivity is not operational.

Indicates that ILMI connectivity is operational.

Disables ILMI protocol. If you select Disabled , the other fields in this window will not show.

Enables ILMI protocol.

Specifies whether address registration is disabled or enabled.

Connectivity Procedure

Enabled

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Disables the Address Registration field. Address

Registration can be enabled only if the ILMI Protocol field is enabled.

Enables address registration.

Indicates the establishment and subsequent loss of ILMI connectivity detection.

Disables the ILMI Connectivity Procedure.

Enables the ILMI Connectivity Procedure: the

Attachment Point Detection and Secure Link field functions are available for enablement. You must select Enabled if you want to also enable the

Attachment Point Detection and Secure Link fields.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-26

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Table 6-5. Field Descriptions for the PNNI ILMI Configuration Window

Field Name

Attachment Point

Detection

(display only)

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Description

Specifies that a change of attachment point caused by possible swapping of 2 links that were not detected by signalling will be detected.

Secure Link

(display only)

Default:

Range: N/A

Format: predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Auto Configuration Default:

Timer T

(display only)

Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

Disabled

Enabled

Default: 5

Range: 0–(2

-1)

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Disables Attachment Point Detection.

ILMI Protocol fields are enabled.

Detects non-ILMI connections that were not dropped when an attachment point changed.

ILMI Secure Link Procedure is disabled. It can be enabled only if the Connectivity Procedure and

Attachment Point Detection fields are enabled.

Disables the ILMI Secure Link Procedure.

Enables the ILMI Secure Link Procedure. If a response is not received, all calls are cleared, and disconnected.

Specifies the ability to automatically configure the actual VPI/VCI range based on the local

VPI/VCI and the remote VPI/VCI ranges (VPI and

VCI range negotiation).

For more information on automatic configuration procedures, see ATM Forum ILMI (Integrated Local

Management Interface), 4.0, af-ilmi-0065.000, Section

8.3.4

Disables the Automatic Configuration Procedure: the actual VPI and VCI are not automatically configured, and the connections are set up by using local VPI/VCI ranges which are defined by user.

Enables the Automatic Configuration Procedure: actual VPI/VCI are automatically configured, and the connections are set up by using the overlap

VPI/VCI ranges of the local VPI/VCI and the remote VPI/VCI ranges.

Auto configuration can be enabled only if the

ILMI Protocol field is Enabled.

Used to poll when link is operational.

The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear within the range specfied (see the Values column).

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-27

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Table 6-5. Field Descriptions for the PNNI ILMI Configuration Window

Field Name

Timer S

(display only)

Retry K

(display only)

ILMI VPI

(display only)

Field Values

Default: 1

Range: 0–(2

-1)

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Default: 4

Range: 0–(2

-1)

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Description

Used to poll when link is not operational.

The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear within the range specfied (see the Values column).

Indicates the number of timeouts before the link becomes non-operational.

The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear within the range specfied (see the Values column).

Indicates the VPI for ILMI protocol channel in which VPI will run.

ILMI VCI

(display only)

Default: 0

Range: This value does not change.

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Default: 16

Range: This value does not change.

Format: numeric

(seconds)

Indicates the VCI for ILMI protocol channel in which VCI will run.

Viewing Registered

Addresses

To set values for ILMI registered addresses, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

1 Click Registered User Address Table on the ILMI Configuration page.

The ILMI Registered User Address Table window appears (see

Figure 6-7).

Figure 6-7. Registered User Address Table

The NSAP Address (Hex) column displays the user’s registered addresses. The Org Scope column displays the scope of the registered

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-28

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface addresses. If the scope is not set by the user, it will default to global (a value of 15 ).

2 To go back to the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window, click Close .

End

Viewing ILMI

Statistics

You can view ILMI statistics on the ILMI Statistics panel of the ILMI Configuration page (see Figure 6-6).

Descriptions of the ILMI statistics data fields are given in the following table.

Table 6-6. Field Descriptions for the ILMI Statistics Page

Field Name

Link Resets

(display only)

Attachment Point

Changed

(display only)

Attachment Point

Verified

(display only)

Secure Link Proc

Initiated

(display only)

ILMI Timeouts

(display only)

Packet Discarded

(display only)

Cold Starts Transmitted

(display only)

Cold Starts

Received

(display only)

Field Values

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Number of times attachment point change was detected.

Number of times attachment point was verified successfully.

Number of times the secure link procedure was initiated.

Number of times the Get Request of any type was timed out.

Number of times a packet (pdu) was discarded due to format error.

Number of times a Cold Start trap message was transmitted.

Number of times a Cold Start trap message was received.

Description

Number of times connectivity went down and then up again.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-29

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Table 6-6. Field Descriptions for the ILMI Statistics Page

Field Name

PDUs Received

(display only)

PDUs Transmitted

(display only)

Time Elapsed

(display only)

Field Values

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Time in seconds (XX)

Description

Total number of packets received.

Total number of packets transmitted.

Time, in seconds, since last reset.

Viewing Interface Utilization Information

Perform the steps in the following procedure to view interface utilization information.

Begin

1 Click the Utilization tab.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-30

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

The Utilization page appears (see Figure 6-8).

Figure 6-8.

ATM PNNI Utilization Page

The buttons at the bottom of the window have the following functions:

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-31

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM PNNI Interface

Button

60 sec

Clear

Poll

Function

Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device.

Select a time interval from the pull-down menu:

5 sec

10 sec

20 sec

30 sec

60 sec (default)

90 sec

2 min

3 min

4 min

5 min

Removes the data in the Average Bits/Sec and Average

Throughput panels.

Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll.

Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to

Poll+ .

Average Throughput/Utilization measurements for ATM interfaces may be enabled or disabled per interface (the default value is Disabled ).

2 Select the time interval in the 60 sec field.

3 Click Poll+ and the polling begins.

The following interface measurements are calculated and displayed:

~ Average number of cells per second

~ Average number of bits per second

~ Average interface utilization, displayed as a percentage of the interface speed

4 Click Poll and the polling terminates.

End

For more information on the Utilization page, see the section, “Utilization

Calculations,” in this chapter.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-32

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Accessing or Viewing the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window

This section provides instructions for configuring an I/O module for the ATM user-to-network interface (UNI) 3.0, 3.1, 4.0 and Integrated Link Management Interface (ILMI) interfaces.

After applying one of the ATM UNI interface types ( AtmUni3-0,

AtmUni3-1 or AtmUni4-0 ) to a channel from the Channel Configuration page, do one of the following to access the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window:

~ Double-click the left mouse button on the channel for which you want to configure the interface.

~ Click the right mouse button on the channel for which you want to configure the interface and a menu appears. Select Configure in the menu.

The ATM UNI Interface Configuration window appears (see Figure 6-9 and Figure 6-10).

Figure 6-9. ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window (3.0 or 3.1)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-33

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Figure 6-10. ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window (4.0)

The buttons in the ATM UNI windows have the following functions:

Button

Retrieve from NSAP database

Calculate Navis NSAP

Address

Function

If you have previously established an

NSAP address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field.

Displays only when you configure user properties to include the Navis NSAP format. For more information, see the appropriate Navis AQueView Element

Management System User Guide .

Automatically calculates the local NSAP address, and populates the NSAP address in the NSAP Address (Hex) field using the Navis algorithm for the slot, port, and channel selected in the fields on the bottom right panel.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-34

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

ATM UNI Interface

Values

Button

Bring Into Service

Take Out of Service

Delete

Copy

Close

Apply

Reset

Function

Displays when the Administrative Status field is OutOfService. Brings an out-ofservice configured interface to in-service status. The value InService appears in the Administrative Status field.

You must first configure the interface before you can use this button.

Displays when the Administrative Status field is InService . Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. The value OutOfService appears in the Administrative Status field.

You must use this command first before clicking the Delete .

Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring.

You must first take interface out of service (by clicking Take Out of Service ) before you can use this button.

Copies this interface to a range of slots, ports, and channels.

Closes this window.

Applies the configuration field value you set.

Resets the fields to the last set of applied values.

To set values for the ATM UNI interface, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

1 Enter values for the fields on this window according to the information provided in Table 6-7.

2 To configure the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field, perform the steps in the section, “Adding NSAP Addresses,” in this chapter, and then return to this procedure.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-35

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

3 To apply the interface configuration values, including the NSAP address configuration, click Apply .

End

Table 6-7. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

Administrative Status

(display only)

Operational Status

(display only)

Field Values

Default:

OutOfService

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

OutOfService

InService

Default:

Unconfigured

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Description

Displays the administrative status of the interface.

Indicates that the interface is out of service.

Indicates that the interface is in service.

Displays the operational status of the interface.

Unconfigured

InService

Indicates that this interface has not been configured.

Indicates that the interface is operational.

OutOfService Indicates that the interface is not operational.

Over Subscription Default: 10

Range: 1–100

Format: Numeric

Specifies the risk factor for this function, which indicates the level of oversubscription allowed by the system.

Note: When entering the maximum and minimum VPI and VCI values in the following two fields, always enter or change the maximum value before entering the minimum value.

SVC Min/Max VPI Default: 0

Range: 0–255

Format: Numeric

SVC Min/Max VCI Default:

Default:

Min: 32

Max: 255

Range: 0–65535

Format: Numeric

Specifies the minimum and maximum VPI values that you can assign to an SVC on this interface.

Note: Disable the ATM signaling field if you want to use the value 0 for the VPI.

Enter the minimum value in the left box and the maximum value in the right box.

Specifies the minimum and maximum VCI values that you can assign to an SVC on this interface.

Enter the minimum value in the left box and the maximum value in the right box.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-36

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 6-7. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

ATM Signaling

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Description

Specifies whether SVCs can be created on this interface.

Note: The value 0 for the VPI is not available for use.

Interface Type

Disabled

Enabled

Default: Network

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Network

Indicates that SVCs cannot be created on this interface.

Indicates that SVCs can be created on this interface.

If you want to use the ILMI protocol, you must select this value. The ILMI protocol is not required if

ATM signaling is disabled.

Note: The value 0 for VPI is available for use.

Specifies whether the network or user format for cell headers will be used.

Note: When you select this value, the Network Prefix field is displayed below the Interface Name field.

User

Indicates that the NNI format for the cell headers will be used.

Wireless Applications: Select this value if you are configuring a link on the MSC side of a cell site-to-MSC link.

Indicates that the UNI format for the cell headers will be used.

Note: When you select this value, the User Address field is displayed below the Interface Name field.

Wireless Applications: Select this value if you are configuring a link on the cell-site side of a cell site-to-MSC link.

Interface Name Default: N/A

Range: 0–20 characters maximum

Format: Alphanumeric

Network Prefix (Hex) Default: 2020.2020.

2020.2020.20

Note: This field is displayed only when the value

Network is selected in the Interface Type field.

Range: N/A

Format: Hexadecimal (13-byte:

18-hexadecimal digit beginning with

39 , 45 or 47 )

Specifies the network prefix address, which is used only for the address registration procedure of ILMI.

This field represents the first 13 bytes of the 20-byte

NSAP address. The last 7 bytes are the user part of this address (User Address field).

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-37

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 6-7. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

User Address

Neighbor System IP

Neighbor Name

Field Values Description

Default: 2020.2020.

2020.2020.20

Note: This field is displayed only then you select the value User in the Interface Type field.

Range: N/A

Format: Hexadecimal (13-byte:

18-hexadecimal digit beginning with

39 , 45 or 47 )

Specifies the user address.

Format:

Default: 0.0.0.0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Specifies the IP address of the neighboring system.

This field is used by auto-discovery protocols. The neighboring system is the attached device for an

ILMI-enabled interface, or the user-configured IP address for an ILMI-disabled interface.

For an ILMI-enabled interface, any user-configured value overrides the ILMI discovered values.

Enter the IP address of the PSAX chassis (or other device) to which the physical connection is made using this interface.

Default: N/A

Range: 1–20 characters maximum

Format: Alphanumeric

(or other device) to which the physical connection is made using this interface.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-38

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 6-7. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

UPC Support

UBR Load Balancing

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Disabled

Enabled

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Disabled

Description

Specifies whether usage parameter control (policing) is to be used on this interface. UPC determines if traffic control is performing to the negotiated

PCR, SCR, or MBS values. This feature is supported on the following modules only:

• OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM 1+1 APS/MSP

• OC-3c 1+1 APS SM/MM

• STM-1 1+1 MSP SM/MM

• High Density E1

• 12-Port Medium Density DS1

The feature is supported on the followking channelized DS3 modules only (when the port(s) are channelized to DS0s):

• 1-Port Channelized DS3 Multiservice

• 1-Port DS3 IMA

• Quadserial

Indicates that UPC support is disabled.

Note: If UPC Support is disabled, traffic policing cannot be supported on any VC.

Indicates that UPC support is enabled, providing traffic policing support for all VCs.

Note: Do not enable the UPC Support field and the

Traffic Shaping field at the same time. Your interface configuration will be rejected. However, UPC Support and VI Support are compatible configuration settings.

Specifies whether unspecified bit rate (UBR) load balancing is used or not.

Note: The virtual interface does not support UBR load balancing.

Enabled

Indicates that unspecified bit rate (UBR) load balancing on the interface is disabled.

Indicates that UBR load balancing on the interface is enabled.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-39

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 6-7. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name Field Values

Ingress Avail BW (cps)

(display only)

Default: 0

Range: Module dependent

Format: Numeric

Description

Bandwidth for UBR connections is not included, unless the UBR Load Balancing field on this interface is Enabled . You will see values in the [Ingress

Avail BW] field only for connections that are in service.

• Any non-CES OC3 and STM-1 APS module will show the value 353207

• Any OC-12 module will show the value 1412830

The values for other types of I/O modules that use this field vary depending on the following parameters :

• IMA - number of ports configured

• DS1/E1/STS-1e - number of channels strapped

• DS3/E3 - Cell Mapping ( Plcp or DirectMapping )

• Serial - port bandwidth configured

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-40

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 6-7. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

Egress Avail BW (cps)

(display only)

SSCOP Rx Wnd Size

Field Values

Default: 0

Range: Module dependent

Format: Numeric

Default: 32

Range: 8–256

Format: Numeric

Description

Bandwidth for UBR connections is not included, unless the UBR Load Balancing field on this interface is Enabled . You will see values in the[Egress

Avail BW] field only for connections that are in service.

• Any non-CES OC3 and STM-1 APS module will show the value 353207

• Any OC-12 module will show the value 1412830

The values for other types of I/O modules that use this field vary depending on the following parameters :

• IMA - IMA - number of ports configured

• DS1/E1/STS-1e - number of channels strapped

• DS3/E3 - Cell Mapping ( Plcp or DirectMapping )

• Serial - port bandwidth configured

The service-specific connection-oriented protocol

(SSCOP) layer. This window shows the total number of packets that must be acknowledged by the receiving side before more packets are sent from the transmitting side.

Range: On the receiving side, the window size for this value must be equal to or greater than the values for the transmitting side for fastest transmission rates.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-41

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 6-7. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

VI Support

VUNI Support

(ATM UNI 4.0 only)

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Disabled

Enabled

Default:

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Description

Virtual interfaces connect to a module’s physical ports and allow virtual channels (VCs) to be assigned to virtual trunks, each with its own priority queue. This option is available only for these modules:

• 1-Port OC3-c 1+1 APS Multimode and Single-

Mode

• 1-Port STM-1 1+1 Multimode and Single-Mode

• 1-Port OC-12c/STM-4c 1+1 APS/MSP Multimode and Single-Mode

• 3-Port DS3/E3 ATM

• 3-Port DS3/E3 ATM Protection

Note: To configure a virtual interface, you must select Enabled . After doing so, the Virtual Interface Table button becomes active.

Note: This field and the Virtual Interface button below it will be ghosted if you are not configuring the ATM UNI interface on the modules in the preceding list.

VI support is disabled.

Virtual interface support is enabled, providing bandwidth allocation restrictions.

In order to configure a virtual interface, you must select Enabled .

Note: This field is ghosted if you are not configuring the ATM UNI interface on a module that supports virtual interfaces.

Note: Do not enable UPC Support and Traffic Shaping at the same time. Your interface configuration will be rejected. However, UPC Support and VI Support are compatible configuration settings.

Note: This field is displayed only when the value

AtmUni4-0 is selected as the interface type on the module channel configuration window.

Specifies whether VUNI is supported on this interface.

Disables virtual UNI support.

Enables virtual UNI support.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-42

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 6-7. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

Traffic Shaping

Addr Org Scope

Local NSAP Address

(Hex)

Field Values

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Disabled

Enabled

Default: Global

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined alphanumeric

Intra

Organization

PlusOne

Community

PlusOne

Regional

InterRegional

Default: N/A

Range: N/A

Format: Valid dotted quad

Description

An input cell selection algorithm (leaky bucket) that smooths bursts of input traffic. Available on these modules:

• STM-1 Multimode and Single-Mode

• OC-3c Multimode and Single-Mode

• OC-12c/STM-4c MM/SM 1+1 APS/MSP.

Disables the feature.

Enables the feature.

Note: This feature must be enabled if using rate shaping prior to egress from an ATM trunk port on the OC-3c APS or the STM-1 MSP modules. Rate shaping is not available on the OC-12c/STM-4c module.

Note: Do not enable Traffic Shaping and UPC Support at the same time. Your interface configuration will be rejected.

ATM user address organizational scope.

The ATM NSAP address of the local end of the connection, in hexidecimal notation. Enter the NSAP address of the local ATM interface (optional).

Viewing ATM UNI Interface Statistics

To view statistics for the ATM UNI interface, on the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window, click the Interface Statistics tab.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-43

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

The ATM UNI Interface Statistics page appears (see Figure 6-11).

Figure 6-11. ATM UNI Interface Statistics Page

The buttons on this window have the following functions:

Table 1

Button

Update

Clear

Poll

Function

Updates the information in the fields.

Removes the values in this window and resets them to 0.

Poll+ initiates the continuous update of statistics. Poll- suspends polling.

The fields on this window are described in Table 6-8.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-44

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 6-8. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI Interface Statistics Page

Field Name Field Values

Valid Cells Received Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2

-1)

Format: Numeric

Errored Cells

Received

Default: 0000000000

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Mismatched Cells

Received

Default: 0000000000

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default:

Valid Cells Sent

Null Cells Sent

Time Elapsed

Description

Number of valid cells received into interface side

A during the amount of time shown in Time

Elapsed field.

Number of errored cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in Time

Elapsed field.

Number of mismatched cells received into interface side A during the amount of time shown in

Time Elapsed field.

Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2

-1)

Format: Numeric

Default: 0.0000 e0

Range: 0-(2

-1)

Format: Numeric

Number of valid cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time

Elapsed field.

Number of null cells transmitted out of interface side B during the amount of time shown in Time

Elapsed field.

Note: This parameter is not supported in the

OC-12c/STM-4c SM/MM 1+1 APS/MSP modules.

Default: 0:00:00

Range: NA

Format: Time in hour

(x), minutes (xx), seconds (xx)

Time elapsed since the last reset in h:mm:ss

(hour: minute:seconds) format.

Configuring the Integrated Link Management Interface (ILMI)

Accessing or Viewing the ILMI

Configuration Page

To display the ILMI Configuration page (see Figure 6-12), click the ILMI Configuration tab.

Setting ILMI

Configuration Values

To set values for ILMI configuration, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

1 Enter values for the fields on this window according to the information provided in Table 6-9.

2 To apply the interface configuration values, click Apply .

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-45

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

3 To go back to the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window, click Close .

End

Figure 6-12. ILMI Configuration Page

The buttons in this window have the following functions:

Button

Registered User Address

Table

Apply

Reset

Close

Update

Function

Displays the Registered User Address

Table.

Applies the configuration field values you set.

Resets the fields to the last set of applied values.

Closes this window.

Updates the information in the fields.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-46

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 6-9. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI ILMI Configuration Window

Field Name

ILMI Operational

Status

(display only)

ILMI Protocol

Address Registration

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Character

Enabled

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Character

Enabled

Connectivity Procedure

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Character

Attachment Point

Detection

Secure Link

(display only)

Field Values

Default: OutOfService

Range: N/A

Format: Character

InService

Enabled

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Character

Enabled

Default:

Enabled

Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Character

Description

Indicates that ILMI connectivity is not operational.

Indicates that ILMI connectivity is operational.

If you select Disabled , the other fields in this window will not take effect.

Enables ILMI.

Address registration can be enabled only if the

ILMI Protocol field is enabled.

Enables address registration.

ILMI Connectivity Procedure is disabled. You must select Enabled if you want to also enable the Attachment Point Detection and Secure Link fields.

ILMI Connectivity Procedure is enabled.

Attachment Point Change Detection can be enabled only if Connectivity Procedure and ILMI

Protocol fields are enabled.

A query will be sent every 5 seconds to detect a change in the address. A response indicates that the user id and address information are the same.

However, if there is a change in the address, all calls will be cleared.

ILMI Secure Link Procedure is disabled. It can be enabled only if Connectivity Procedure and

Attachment Point Detection fields are enabled.

Auto Configuration

(display only)

Default: Disabled

Range: N/A

Format: Character

Enabled

ILMI Secure Link Procedure is enabled. If you do not receive a response, all calls are cleared, and you will be disconnected.

The ability to automatically configure VPI and

VCI is disabled.

Automatically configures the VPI and VCI.

Auto configuration can be enabled only if the

ILMI Protocol field is enabled.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-47

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 6-9. Field Descriptions for the ATM UNI ILMI Configuration Window

Field Name

Timer T

Timer S

Retry K

ILMI VPI

Field Values

Default: 5

Range: Varies

Format: Numeric

Default:

Range: Varies

Format: Numeric

Default:

Range: Varies

Format: Numeric

Description

Timer T in seconds. Used to poll when link is operational.

The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear.

Timer S in seconds. Used to poll when link is not operational.

The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear.

Retry K in seconds. Indicates the number of timeouts before the link becomes non-operational.

The value in this field in displayed as a 32-bit integer, and any number may appear.

VPI for the ILMI protocol channel in which VPI will run.

ILMI VCI

Default: 0

Range: This value does not change.

Format: Numeric

Default: 16

Range: This value does not change.

Format: Numeric

VCI for the ILMI protocol channel in which VCI will run.

Viewing Registered

Addresses

To set values for ILMI registered addresses, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

1 Click Registered User Address Table on the ILMI Configuration page.

The ILMI Registered User Address Table window appears (see

Figure 6-13).

Figure 6-13. Registered User Address Table

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-48

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

The NSAP Address (Hex) column displays the user’s registered addresses.

The Org Scope column displays the scope of the registered addresses. If the scope is not set by the user, it will default to global (a value of 15 ).

2 To go back to the ATM UNI Interface Configuration window, click Close .

End

Viewing ILMI

Statistics

You can view ILMI statistics on the ILMI Statistics panel of the ILMI Configuration page (see Figure 6-12). Descriptions of the ILMI statistics data fields are given in Table 6-10.

Table 6-10. Field Descriptions for the ILMI Statistics Page

Field Name

Link Resets

(display only)

Attachment Point

Changed

(display only)

Attachment Point

Verified

(display only)

Secure Link Proc

Initiated

(display only)

ILMI Timeouts

(display only)

Packet Discarded

(display only)

Cold Starts Transmitted

(display only)

Cold Starts

Received

(display only)

Field Values

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Number of times attachment point change was detected.

Number of times attachment point was verified successfully.

Number of times the secure link procedure was initiated.

Number of times the Get Request of any type was timed out.

Number of times a packet (pdu) was discarded due to format error.

Number of times a Cold Start trap message was transmitted.

Number of times a Cold Start trap message was received.

Description

Number of times connectivity went down and then up again.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-49

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Table 6-10. Field Descriptions for the ILMI Statistics Page

Field Name

PDUs Received

(display only)

PDUs Transmitted

(display only)

Time Elapsed

(display only)

Field Values

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Numeric

Default: 0

Range: N/A

Format: Time in seconds (XX)

Description

Total number of packets received.

Total number of packets transmitted.

Time, in seconds, since last reset.

Viewing Interface Utilization Information

Perform the steps in the following procedure to view interface utilization information.

Begin

1 Click the Utilization tab.

The Utilization page appears (see Figure 6-14).

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-50

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Figure 6-14. ATM UNI Utilization Page

The buttons at the bottom of the window have the following functions:

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-51

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the ATM UNI Interfaces

Button

60 sec

Clear

Poll

Function

Time, in seconds or minutes, to poll the PSAX device.

Select a time interval from the pull-down menu:

5 sec

10 sec

20 sec

30 sec

60 sec (default)

90 sec

2 min

3 min

4 min

5 min

Removes the data in the Average Bits/Sec and Average

Throughput panels.

Poll+ continuously updates the statistics and changes the button label to Poll.

Poll- terminates polling and changes the button label to

Poll+ .

Average Throughput/Utilization measurements for ATM interfaces may be enabled or disabled per interface (the default value is Disabled ).

2 Select the time interval in the 60 sec field.

3 Click Poll+ and the polling begins.

The following interface measurements are calculated and displayed:

~ Average number of cells per second

~ Average number of bits per second

~ Average interface utilization, displayed as a percentage of the interface speed

4 Click Poll and the polling terminates.

End

For more information on the Utilization page, see the section, “Utilization

Calculations,” in this chapter.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-52

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the CAS TrunkLine Interface

Accessing or Viewing the CAS TrunkLine Interface Configuration Window

This section provides instructions for configuring an I/O module for the CAS

Trunk Line interface.

After applying the CASTrunkLine interface type to a channel from the

Channel Configuration page, do one of the following to access the CAS

TrunkLine Interface Configuration window:

~ Double-click the left mouse button on the channel for which you want to configure the interface.

~ Click the right mouse button on the channel for which you want to configure the interface and a menu appears. Select Configure in the menu.

The CAS TrunkLine Interface Configuration window appears (see

Figure 6-15).

Figure 6-15. CAS TrunkLine Interface Configuration Window

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-53

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the CAS TrunkLine Interface

The buttons in this window have the following functions:

Button

Bring Into Service

Take Out of Service

Delete

Copy

Close

Apply

Reset

Function

Displayed when the Administrative Status field is OutOfService . Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status.

The value InService displays in the Administrative Status field.

You must first configure the interface before you can use this button.

Displayed when the Administrative Status field is InService . Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. The value OutOfService displays in the Administrative Status field.

You must use this button first before using the

Delete button.

Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring.

You must first take interface out of service (by clicking the Take Interface Out of Service button) before you can use this button.

Copies this interface to a range of slots, ports, and channels.

Closes this window.

Applies the configuration field value you set.

Resets the fields to the last set of applied values.

Setting CAS TrunkLine Interface Values

To set the values for the Circuit Emulation interface, enter the values for the fields on the CAS TrunkLine Interface Configuration window from the values given in Table 6-11.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-54

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the CAS TrunkLine Interface

Table 6-11. Field Descriptions for the CAS Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

CAS Protocol

Traffic Flow Direction

Field Values

Default: Wink-Start

Range: As noted below

Format: predefined

Wink-Start

Description

Specifies the type of CAS protocol to be used. The protocol selected must match that used on the other end of the trunk or line.

A timed off-hook signal of approximately 140 milliseconds, which indicates the availability of an incoming register to receive digital information from the calling office.

Loop-start-network

Loop-start-user

Ground-start-network

Ground-start-user Indicates on-hook and off-hook conditions initiated by the user to the central office in a voice network once ground detection occurs in both ends of a connection.

Itu-t-r2

Indicates on-hook and off-hook conditions initiated between two central office lines in a voice network once ground detection occurs in both ends of a connection.

Default: below.

Both

Range: As noted

Format: Predefined

Indicates that European R2 CAS protocol is used.

Specifies which direction CAS trunk or line will flow.

Both

Indicates on-hook and off-hook conditions initiated between two central office lines in a voice network when connecting from the telephone set to a switch.

Indicates on-hook and off-hook conditions initiated from the user to a central office in a voice network when connecting from the telephone set to a switch.

Incoming

Outgoing

Supports both incoming and outgoing CAS signaling.

Supports incoming CAS signaling only.

Supports outgoing CAS signaling only.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-55

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the CAS TrunkLine Interface

Table 6-11. Field Descriptions for the CAS Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

CAS Addressing

Type

Field Values

Default: Dtmf

Range: As noted below

Format: Predefined

Dtmf

R1-mf

Description

Specifies the addressing type used for the CAS trunk or line.

CAS Group ID

CAS Bit Pattern

Type

(display only)

R2-mf

Default:

Format: Predefined

Abcd

Range: As noted below

Range: 0–255

Format: Numeric

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency.

North American Multi-Frequency signaling protocol. Valid only when the ProtocolType is set to wink-start.

European Multi-Frequency signaling protocol.

Valid only when the value Itu-t-r2 is selected in the ProtocolTypeCAS Protocol field.

The identifier to associate a group of CAS trunks or lines which have same reachability. When the

SG is disabled, it must be specified with a nonzero value. When the SG is enabled, the value should be set to zero, which indicates that no routing is to be performed based on the value.

Specifies the type of bit pattern used for supervisory signaling.

Operational Status

(display only)

Select this value for SF framing on any module supporting SF.

Specifies the operational status of the CAS interface.

Default: Unconfigured

Range: As noted below.

Format: Predefined

Unconfigured This channel is not operational because the interface is not configured.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-56

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Circuit Emulation Interface

Table 6-11. Field Descriptions for the CAS Interface Configuration Window

Field Name Field Values

OutOfService

Description

Two types of errors cause this status.

1. A loss-of-signal condition can exist due to any one of the following:

• The module port is not physically connected to a cable.

• The cable is not connected at the other end to a device.

• The cable is broken.

InService

2. A loss of frame or encoding can exist due to a problem with the framing or encoding of the signal. For example, a repeater could corrupt the signal.

The port is physically connected to a cable; the cable is conducting the signal; and the signal is being transmitted and received correctly.

Specifies the administrative status of the CAS interface.

Administrative Status

(display only)

Default: Unconfigured

Range: As noted below

Format:

Unconfigured

OutOfService

InService

The interface for the port is not configured.

The interface has not yet been brought into service, or in-service interface has been set to out of service with the Take Out of Service button.

The interface has been brought into service with the Bring Into Service button.

Configuring the Circuit Emulation Interface

Accessing or Viewing the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window

This section provides instructions for configuring an I/O module for the circuit emulation interface.

After applying the CircuitEmulation interface type to a channel from the

Channel Configuration page, do one of the following to access the Circuit

Emulation Interface Configuration window:

~ Double-click the left mouse button on the channel for which you want to configure the interface.

~ Click the right mouse button on the channel for which you want to configure the interface and a menu appears. Select Configure in the menu.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-57

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Circuit Emulation Interface

The Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration window appears (see

Figure 6-16).

Figure 6-16. Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window

The buttons on this window have the following functions:

Button Function

Retrieve from NSAP database If you have previously established an

NSAP address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field.

Calculate Navis NSAP Address Displays only when you configure user properties to include the Navis NSAP format. For more information, see the appropriate Navis AQueView Element

Management System User Guide .

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-58

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Circuit Emulation Interface

Button

Bring Into Service

Take Out of Service

Delete

Copy

Configure H248 TID

Close

Apply

Reset

Function

Displays when the Administrative Status field is OutOfService. Brings an out-ofservice configured interface to in-service status. The value InService appears in the Administrative Status field.

You must first configure the interface before you can use this button.

Displays when the Administrative Status field is InService . Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. The value OutOfService appears in the Administrative Status field.

You must use this command first before clicking the Delete .

Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring.

You must first take interface out of service (by clicking Take Out of Service ) before you can use this button.

Copies this interface to a range of slots, ports, and channels.

Displays the H.248 Termination ID Configuration window. For more information on using this module with H.248, see the H.248 Media Gateway Control User

Guide for the PacketStar

PSAX Multiservice

Media Gateways.

Closes this window.

Applies the configuration field value you set.

Resets the fields to the last set of applied values.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-59

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Circuit Emulation Interface

Button

Retrieve from NSAP database

Calculate Navis NSAP

Address

Bring Into Service

Take Out of Service

Delete

Copy

Function

When you enter an ATM NSAP address in the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field and click this button, the Select NSAP window displays. You can retrieve or add this

NSAP address into the Select NSAP window.

Note: This button appears only when you configure user properties to include the

Navis NSAP format. For more information, see the appropriate Navis ™ AQueView

Element Management System User Guide .

Automatically calculates the local NSAP address, and populates the NSAP address in the NSAP Address (Hex) field using the

Navis algorithm for the slot, port, and channel selected in the fields on the bottom right panel.

Displays when the Administrative Status field is OutOfService. Brings an out-ofservice configured interface to in-service status. The value InService displays in the Administrative Status field.

You must first configure the interface before you can use this button.

Displays when the Administrative Status field is InService. Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status.

The value OutofService displays in the

Administrative Status field.

You must use this button first before using the Delete button.

Deletes an out-of-service interface and redisplays the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring.

You must first take interface out of service

(using the Take Out of Service button) before you can use the Delete button.

Copies this interface to a range of slots, ports, and channels.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-60

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Circuit Emulation Interface

Button

Configure H248 TID

Close

Apply

Reset

Function

Displays the H.248 Termination ID Configuration window. For more information on using this module with H.248, see the

H.248 Media Gateway Control User Guide for the PacketStar

PSAX Multiservice Media

Gateways.

Closes this window.

Applies the configuration field value you set.

Resets the fields to the last set of applied values.

Configuring Circuit Emulation Interface Values

To set the values for the Circuit Emulation interface, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

1 Enter values in the fields on this window according to the information provided in Table 6-12.

2 To configure the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field, perform the steps in the section, “Adding NSAP Addresses,” in this chapter, and then return to this procedure.

3 To apply the interface configuration values, including the NSAP address configuration, click Apply .

End

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-61

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Circuit Emulation Interface

Table 6-12. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window

Field Names

Interface Type

Signaling

Speed Adaptation

Field Values

Default: N/A

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Default:

CCS Clear

Channel signaling

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

CCS Clear Channel signaling

CAS (channel-associated signaling)

Enabled

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Disabled

Description

Circuit Emulation displays as the interface type.

The type of signaling used.

Note: This field is displayed only when configuring the circuit emulation interface on these modules:

• 6-Port Multiserial

• 6-Port Enhanced DS1 Multiservice

• 1-Port Channelized DS3

Clear channel signaling—ABCD signaling bits not used.

Channel associated signaling—signaling bit transport based on ATM Forum stardard for ABCD signaling bits. ISDN requires the use of the whole port. Will not function with CAS.

Refers to robbed-bit signaling in circuit emulation interfaces.

Similar functionality is referred to as the adaptive property of the transmit clock source in T1/E1 interfaces.

Refers to robbed-bit signaling in circuit emulation interfaces.

Signaling abcd bit pattern for first 2.5 seconds.

CAS Idle abcd Pattern

Default: 0

Range: 0–15

Format: Numeric

CAS Busy abcd Pattern

Default: 15

Range: 0–15

Format: Numeric

Data Pattern Default: 127 (idle pattern)

Range: 0–255

Format: Numeric

TC Final abcd Bits Default: CasBusy

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

CasBusy

Signaling abcd bit pattern after 2.5 seconds.

The data pattern to be transmitted out on a circuit emulation port, if no user data is available for the transmission.

Specifies the bit pattern to be transmitted after

2.5 seconds.

CasIdle

CAS busy bit pattern transmitted after 2.5 seconds.

CAS idle bit pattern transmitted after 2.5 seconds.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-62

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Circuit Emulation Interface

Table 6-12. Field Descriptions for the Circuit Emulation Interface Configuration Window

Field Names

DownStream Interworking

Field Values

Default: TrunkCond

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

Description

Trunk conditioning will be done with ATM network. The PSAX system will generate an idle data pattern in the payload of ATM cells to send a signal to indicate a connection failure.

Unsupp

OAM

No interworking will be done with ATM network.

The PSAX system will not send a signal to indicate a connection failure. Do not choose this value if you want to enable trunk conditioning.

OAM interworking will be done with ATM network. The PSAX system will use ATM OAM cells to send a signal to indicate a connection failure.

You can use this value if all the ATM switches along the connection support ATM OAM cells.

You must use this value if you selected

Indicates whether the interface is configured and brought into service or not.

[Admin Status]

(display only)

Default:

OutOfService

Range: N/A

Format: Predefined

OutOfService

InService

The interface is not configured and brought into service.

The interface is configured and brought into service.

Indicates whether any condition is preventing the interface from passing traffic.

[Oper Status]

(display only)

Default:

OutOfService

Range: N/A

Format: predefined alphanumeric

OutOfService

InService

Local NSAP Address

(Hex)

Default:

Hexadecimal

Range: N/A

Format: Hexadecimal

Indicates that a condition is preventing the interface from passing traffic.

Indicates that no condition is preventing the interface from passing traffic.

The ATM NSAP address of the local end of the connection, in hexadecimal notation. Enter the

NSAP address of the local ATM interface.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-63

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Frame Relay User/Network Interfaces

Accessing or Viewing the Frame Relay Interface Configuration Window

This section provides instructions for configuring an I/O module for the

Frame Relay user or Frame Relay network interface.

After applying the FrameRelayNni or FrameRelayUni interface type to a channel from the Channel Configuration page, do one of the following to access the Frame Relay Interface Configuration window:

~ Double-click the left mouse button on the channel for which you want to configure the interface.

~ Click the right mouse button on the channel for which you want to configure the interface and a menu appears. Select Configure in the menu.

The Frame Relay Interface Configuration window is displayed (see

Figure 6-17).

Figure 6-17. Frame Relay Interface Window (Before Clicking Apply)

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-64

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Frame Relay User/Network Interfaces

The buttons in this window have the following functions:

Button

Retrieve from NSAP database

Calculate Navis NSAP

Address

Bring Into Service

Take Out of Service

Delete

Copy

Close

Function

If you have previously established an

NSAP address database, click this button to retrieve an entry from this list to populate the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field.

Automatically calculates the local NSAP address, and populates the NSAP address in the NSAP Address (Hex) field using the

Navis algorithm for the slot, port, and channel selected in the fields on the bottom right panel.

This button is displayed only when you configure user properties to include the

Navis NSAP format. For more information, see the appropriate Navis ™ AQue-

View

Element Management System User

Guide .

Brings an out-of-service configured interface to in-service status. The value InService is displayed in the Administrative

Status field. This button is (displayed when the Administrative Status field is

OutOfService ). You must first configure the interface before you can use this command.

Takes an in-service configured interface to out-of-service status. The value OutOf-

Service is displayed in the Administrative

Status field. This button is (displayed when the Administrative Status field is

I nService ). You must use this command first before using the Delete command.

Deletes an out-of-service interface and is redisplayed the Port and Channel Configuration window for the module you are configuring.

You must first take interface out of service

(using the Take Interface Out of Service command) before you can use this command.

Copies this interface to a range of slots, ports, and channels.

Displays the LMI DLCI status of this interface.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-65

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Frame Relay User/Network Interfaces

Apply

Reset

Button Function

Applies the configuration field value you set (see step 1).

Resets the fields to the last set of applied values.

Setting Values for the Frame Relay UNI/NNI Interface

To set values for the Frame Relay interface, perform the steps in the following procedure.

Begin

1 Select the values for the fields on this window from the values given in

Table 6-13.

2 To configure the Local NSAP Address (Hex) field, perform the steps in the section, “Adding NSAP Addresses,” in this chapter, and then return to this procedure.

3 To apply the interface configuration values, including the NSAP address configuration, click Apply .

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-66

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Frame Relay User/Network Interfaces

If you selected a value other than NoLmi in the DLCMI State field, then the right-hand panel of the Frame Relay Interface Configuration window appears (see Figure 6-18).

Figure 6-18. Frame Relay Interface Window (After Clicking Apply)

4 To activate the interface after you have applied the configuration values, click Bring Into Service .

5 Continue to step 2 of the section, “Performing Bulk Operations,” in this chapter.

End

Table 6-13. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

Interface Type

Operational

Status

(display only)

Administrative

Status

(display only)

Field Values

FrameRelayUni

FrameRelayNni

OutOfService

InService

OutOfService

Description

Indicates that the UNI format for the cell headers will be used (frame relay user-network interface).

Indicates that the NNI format for the cell headers will be used (frame relay network-network interface).

Indicates that the interface is not operational.

Indicates that the interface is operational.

Indicates that the interface is in service.

Indicates that the interface is not in service.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

255-700-243

Release 8.0

6-67

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Frame Relay User/Network Interfaces

Table 6-13. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay Interface Configuration Window

Field Name

LMI Operational

Status

(display only)

DLCI Length

(display only)

DLCMI State Default: NoLmi

(for frame relay UNI only)

Field Values

Default:

OutOfService

InService

TwoOctets10Bits

Description

Indicates that the local management interface

(LMI) is not operational.

Indicates that the local management interface is operational.

Type of data link connection identifier (DLCI) format used.

No local management interface (LMI).

Note: If you select this value, the fields described in this table after Over Subscription will not appear.

LMI is a DTE device.

Over

Subscription

LmiDte

(for frame relay UNI only)

LmiDce

(for frame relay UNI only)

LmiNni

(for frame relay NNI only)

Default: 10

Range: 1–10

LMI is a DCE device.

Local management interface is used with network-to-network interface.

LMI Protocol

LMI

Asynchronous

Interworking Type

Throughput

Default:

Ansi

ATT

None

Enabled

Ccitt

Disabled

Default:

Frf5

Default:

K56

Frf8

K64

The connection admission control takes into account the oversubscription factor when determining if a connection can be made.

Protocol uses Annex A (ITU Q.933, reference

RFR.1).

Protocol uses Annex D (ANSI T2.617).

LMI protocol.

Use of local management interface is disabled.

This mode sends LMI message whenever there is a status change.

This mode waits for regular LMI polling cycle.

FRF.8 (Frame Relay Forum Implementation

Agreement)—frame relay to ATM PVC service interworking.

FRF.5 (Frame Relay Forum Implementation

Agreement)—frame relay to ATM PVC service interworking.

The throughput bandwidth of the interface, in kb.

PacketStar

PSAX 12-Port Medium-Density DS1 Multiservice Module User Guide , Issue 1

6-68

Release 8.0

255-700-243

Chapter 6 Configuring the Interfaces Using the AQueView

EMS

Configuring the Frame Relay User/Network Interfaces

Table 6-13. Field Descriptions for the Frame Relay Interface Configuration Window

N391

Field Name

N392

N393

T391

T392

NT3

Field Values

Default: 6

Range: 1–255

Default:

Range: 1–10

Default:

Range: 5–30

Default:

Range: 1–10

Range: 5–30

Default: 10

Range: 5–30

Local NSAP Address

(Hex)

Default: N/A

Range: N/A

Format: hexadecimal

The ATM NSAP address of the local end of the connection, in hexidecimal notation. Enter the

NSAP address of the local ATM interface

(optional).